Home

DIALux Version 4.4

1. 196 319 Insert street elements via MENU cccceceeeeeeeeees 196 320 Insert street elements via context mMenu 197 321 Properties of a roadway General ccee 197 322 Properties of a roadway Street coating 198 323 Properties of a roadway Observer 000 198 324 Properties of a roadway Surfaces ccccccceeee 199 325 Insert valuation field via context menu 199 326 common val atior field sietsciactentgonsatpuraanarntamcnstens 200 327 Calculation ad wats tie get ete cana 200 328 Calculation Grid Illuminance Class eeee 201 329 Illumination Class Wizard Welcome dialogue 203 330 Illumination Class Wizard Typical Speed 203 331 Illumination Class Wizard Main Users and Other USET Senensi EA NETE 203 332 Illumination Class Wizard Main Weather Type 204 333 Illumination Class Wizard Interchanges 204 334 Illumination Class Wizard Traffic Flow of Motorised VEE se sth crar carted A 205 335 Illumination Class Wizard Conflict Zone 205 336 Illumination Class Wizard Complexity of Field of WISIOM aE ates ulate eaceseea ant ena hoi a tid 206 337 Illumination Class Wizard Degree of Navigational UT CUNY 5 ascetic enti ae Sealant Ghat 206 338 Illumination Class Wizard Brightness of SUNON Si cates nnssee a cance TAE 207 339 Illumination Class Wizard Fi
2. Right click on next line and select Copy xxx to Command Line to render animation KFIO KFF249 As written in the first line please make a right click on the line KFIO KFF249 Depending on the setting of your animation the values for KFI and KFF can differ DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 272 DIALux Version 4 4 Debhaerrtawmawb B 83 test Ope Cost Queue erun in Sele EuR 1 fsetesaa Aa 0 3 wrin25 HFF249 Meseages Linited DlALinc pen end tonemapper brightness 1 Right click on next line and select Copy xxx to Command Line to render a f KFIO KFF249 Insert gt if clock_on declare CAML declare CAML else if frame_nui declare CAML declare CAML end if frame_nui declare CAML Bookmark declare CAML Fie end if frame_nut Search declare CAML Selection declare CAML end i z i ram ae T Close Current File Ctrl F4 declare declare CAML Context Help Fi end Show Messages Alt M if frame_nui Properties Colors Keys etc declare CAMLGcarion lt 7 507905 2s JF IF UIT ZF declare CAMLOOKAT lt 8 04822 2 59223 68 7168 gt end if frame_number 5 declare CAMLOCATION lt 7 96055 2 54381 69 5806 gt Paste T o F OF Copy the string KFIO KFF249 to the toolbar c L 44 c 9 Ins Fig 441 Starting an anmation in PovRay using key frames Making a right click a context menu appears Select the Copy xxx to Comman
3. acon fo pull an atyect mio a o Set acne War i poo m 2 one E 11 000 m B 1 000 m H fi om Standard elements E Room elements GB Windows and doors ag Exterior mene clements Mel Catculation surfaces Calculation points 9 Furniture Files H Indoor A Gutdooe Round column B rroen E Furna Coa W Lumi Y bum Output Flat ceiling For Help press Ft Fig 107 Edit rooms Insert room elements via Property Page DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 77 DIALux Version 4 4 Insert Furniture Insert Furniture You can insert furniture into the project in the same way as room elements by using Drag amp Drop or the Property Page ae E or eee z i fig Soe me fi Be i p mp pee bma aama ae bed Fig 108 Drag and Drop of furniture Insert via Property Page You can also insert objects numerically by entering coordinates in the furniture Property Page within the Inspector Select the object in the furniture tree enter the desired position in the nspector and click on nsert Create Furniture You can create your own furniture by combining standard bodies The following example of a small shelf describes the procedure a i guacy AREA 2 f L Miar aioe pm iin lili Pull the cube into the CAD window Bp mi oo F ine dime ime F Fig 109 Create furniture Standard bodies DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 78 DIALux Version
4. b p p 1 bo r E ive aa TEF Dk F a BERS ep bey A le T p 22 m Ea adhe Dag p p bur m Fiar 2 m e im i Fi Fig 255 Automatically by the walls generated temporary help lines In the screenshot you can see the red help lines which follow the direction of the tilted walls These help lines are generated when you move with one object e g luminaire for a short while above any other object e g wall The help lines are visible until the left mouse button is released b ee i ig r EE ob TE F i we r apm j a E M ka O T 22 E took Bas oe C ie P m n i m EE A k E 4 Et rmi 2 1 E TT m Fig 256 Automatically by an object generated temporary help lines Here you can see help lines generated by the cube Now it is pretty easy to align cube and luminaire Helping areas defined in the ruler In ground plan front and side view there are rulers located on the left and on the top of the CAD window These ruler will show you the mouse position in X Y X Z and Y Z direction From these ruler you can generate helping areas which are defined in a specific position and are useful to align objects to DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 164 DIALux Version 4 4 F I f a2 To insert a helping wren double Click in the nes or drag ard drap an nran fern the rular iip he CAD T msan numen al WSE jUst Mako NGRCECK M Ene filer ne mn the nran Fig 257 Creating h
5. Cut A Copy Delete Set DWG or DXF origin here Selection hidden Fig 200 Emergency lighting Insert escape route lighting You can select the luminaire you want to use you can define the luminous flux which LEO to be used if there is more than one and you can define a desired illuminance level to be reached on the escape route The maximum distances for the first luminaire and between the luminaires are calculated and used for the positioning of the luminaires Also you can select if there should be luminaires in the positions of the kinks of the DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 131 DIALux Version 4 4 escape route If necessary there can be more than one escape route and luminaire arrangement in a room hr E Se fa Lanan Jemma gt Pe ar erie TETE E pa oprasi eto A nr f Pejn Bie aes e ha Aa eee Pe ioe 4 ome ig io im ia i An m i Fe ies ee ee 7 5 5 a ore as He brenit beee da i aa es oe E T rm ee re i Ea fa i om iai oe fcr k ium 7 AAE 1S Ema ue Fig 201 Escape route lighting Before the escape route with the escape route luminaries is planned normally the positions of luminaires are also defined by the positions of MANDATORY POINTS OF EMPHASIS Initial design is conducted by situating luminaires to reveal specific hazards and highlight safety equipment and signs in addition to providing illumination to assist safe travel
6. DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 83 DIALux Version 4 4 the Property Page and can be assigned a colour a texture material and so on debe ee ee ne a Fig 119 Selecting specific surfaces from a volume Windows and Doors Windows and doors can also be inserted into the layout via Drag amp Drop They can only be positioned in walls Fig 120 Drag amp drop for windows and doors Since windows and doors can only be placed in walls the door in this illustration is automatically placed vertically in the nearest wall These objects automatically face the right way DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 84 In order to occupy only one surface of an object with the texture hold the SHIFT key In order to occupy all surfaces of an object with the texture hold the CTRL key DIALux Version 4 4 Insert Textures Insert via Drag amp Drop You can insert textures into your project with Drag amp Drop arith fF ee SS pe Pe ee ae 3 b0es E i Peas Pew Be ee ee oe oe Pe ie ket em i a bien se imi Bim Baisa Fi ba ma mm H i m Am E b kma Fig 121 Insert textures via Drag amp Drop If you want to assign a texture to a surface you simply go to the colours tree select the desired texture or colour hold the left mouse button and drag it to the CAD and drop it onto correct surface You can place textures and colours on every real surface fu
7. DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 280 DIALux Version 4 4 low_error_factor 0 07 low_error_factor 1 0 gray threshold reduces the colour in the radiosity calculations As mentioned above the blue sky affects the colour of the whole scene when radiosity is calculated To reduce this colouring effect without affecting radiosity in general you can increase gray threshold 1 0 means no colour in radiosity at all gray_threshold 0 0 default gray_threshold 0 5 gray_threshold 1 0 Another important parameter 1s pretrace end Together with pretrace_start it specifies the pretrace steps that are done Lower values lead to more pretrace steps and more accurate results but also to significantly slower rendering pretrace_end 0 2 pretrace_end 0 02 pretrace_end 0 004 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 281 DIALux Version 4 4 It s worth experimenting with the things affecting radiosity to get some feeling for how things work The next 3 images show some more experiments A m n r i _ ambient 3 instead of ambient O forone ambient 0 5 instead of ambient O for all error_bound 0 04 recursion_limit 2 object objects sky ambient 0 Finally you can strongly change the appearance of the whole scene with the sky s texture The following pictures give some example l yellow blue gradient from left to right light dark gradient from left to right light dark gradient from bottom to top Really good results depend a lot on the uni
8. Ee a as m i F in E aia in kali E i Fig 284 Calculation points Horizontal calculation points shown at the right side of the figure above cannot be rotated They always measure the planar illuminance of the perpendicular incoming light Vertical calculation points shown at the left side of the figure above can be turned about the Z axis They can measure the planar normal illuminance the semi cylindrical illuminance or the cylindrical of the incoming light The type can be selected in the Property Page Free calculation points can be rotated about all axes They measure the planar illuminance of the light incoming in the direction of the arrow The output lists of all calculation points are on one page Calculation Points List They are sorted according to their type planar semi cylindrical cylindrical and their designation The summary of the results shows maximum minimum and average value Calculation points are a good tool to get the illuminance of stairs blackboards etc UGR Calculation A major enhancement of DIALux affects the UGR calculation It can produce the following UGR results 1 The UGR table for all luminaires with direct lighting with a spacing to height ratio SHR of 0 25 0r 1 2 The single sheet output and the summary of standard rooms rectangular without furniture only one type of luminaire shows the four standard UGR values for the le
9. declare LIGHTCORRECTIONVALUE 1 0 declare CAMLOCATION lt 1 23 clock 11 1 15 3 11 gt declare CAMLOOKAT lt 12 4 1 5 1 0 gt In DIALux the 3D view was turned in that way to enable the camera path to go through the whole room In the beginning clock 0 that means the position X is 1 23m Clock will be counted up in 25 steps from O to 1 value from the Ini Tile The X position of the camera changes DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 275 DIALux Version 4 4 from 1 23m in the first step to 1 23m 1 25 x 11m 1 67m in the second step The last X position is 1 23m 25 25 x 11m 12 23m The clock variable can be used a number of times in one file It can be used for translation and rotation in the same animation So the camera moves along a path turning the viewing direction around its up axis For example declare GAMMA 1 4 declare AMBIENTLIGHT 0 0 declare LIGHTCORRECTIONVALUE 1 0 declare CAMLOCATION lt 1 18 clock 11 1 15 3 13 gt declare CAMLOOKAT lt 12 4 1 56 1 02 gt global_settings ambient_light AMBIENTLIGHT assumed_gamma GAMMA tonemapper low_value 1e 005 high_value 0 8 camera location CAMLOCATION right lt 1 33333 0 0 gt up lt 0 1 0 gt sky lt 0 1 0 gt angle 77 look_at CAMLOOKAT translate CAMLOCATION rotate lt 0 180 clock 0 gt translate CAMLOCATION In this example the rotation is reduced to 180 degree and it is added to the POV file which already includes t
10. Show Colour Layer Hame a LY PEFPUINTS i Force layer colour for elements with own colour Fig 375 DWG DXF settings Edit a Room based on the DWG DXF Ground Plan To move the room to a certain position of the dwg dxt ground plan just click on this point with the right mouse button and use the option Set DWG or DXF origin here Fig 376 Move the dwg dxf origin with mouse and context menu After you moved one corner of the room to the origin of the dwg dxf drawing you can adjust the room geometry The easiest way Is to drag the corners of your room after selecting Edit room geometry from The Guide DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 229 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 377 Drag the corners to align the room with the drawing Now you can insert further elements like doors and windows based on the drawing Fig 378 Insert doors windows furniture Working with the DWG DXF Background in the 3D View You can use the CAD drawing as a background image in the 3D view Usually it is recommended to use the option Represent 2D projection of dwg dxf in 3D view from the Property Page DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 230 DIALux Version 4 4 Filename Layer Coordinates system UCS Scale DF Snap Uris n the DOF tle Metres he Fig 379 Using 2D projection of dwg dxf in 3D view Fig 380 3D view with DXF background You can display or hide the dwg dxt background from the Window
11. Tar Erpe cet aaa wn rea ara cer Leergeandnehen Jaer oarder mirho auf bean Her peh iarr ir ago korek hi bam Puree von Berien Fi eri r fie pruti rh da Ai heri keah charki mt Grech bere Ger aeai Etre huna eer et hd beck et O fee oh ymy E Lahim By impe hg E Ire i e ham Freg try gt akhi Berti 1 Ma Urteicchibeter Bereich 1 A Unieichieter Beret 7 Fig 410 An assessement zone that is added to another assessement zone pame und eich mecien Laure T E i l Egesiinig berechnen DO u feigendem Beed puschisgen rT Lit peor inten iena rana a De Egret dm angreb herrada eee cher Umad ien Tat werd aa ao ees Boe fiber a orc bam Dahiana wan Bemir Ee mare ur be on ob dt Aebersold Grech Grieg oo dori Erei geie horas port thet rm bmi J oeii Th werwendebe Leuctten Do Guan j Ere p Lary oo Etir Seah A aberti Gerech i Fig 411 An assessment zone that is added to the superordinate utilisation zone When an assessment zone is added to another zone or to the superordinate utilisation zone then this zone is no longer calculated independently that is on the basis of its parameters Instead the results of the other assessment zone respectively the results of the superordinate utilisation zone are allocated to the dependent assessment zone Such dependent assessment zones get their results as soon as the independent assessment zones are calculated Results are simply allocated area weighted
12. There are two main constraints concerning adding of assessment zones to others First you can only add to DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 248 DIALux Version 4 4 such assessment zones that are independently calculated Second each utilisation zone needs at least one assessment zone that is independently calculated Documentation of energy evaluation results 6 0 Energiebewertung o hI Zusammenfassung O Bewertungszonenliste 5 Zonen 0B Zone 1 0 Zusammenfassung 0O Raumliste B E Raum 1 Energiebewertung Zusammenfassung 0 Bereichsliste 9 Bereiche Belichteter Bereich 1 1 Zusammenfassung if Parameter Unbelichteter Bereich 1 O Zusammenfassung oD Parameter 0 Unbelichteter Bereich 2 _ Zusammenfassung cof Parameter Zone 2 5 Zone 3 Fig 412 Outputs for an energy evaluation There are several outputs for an energy evaluation to show the calculated energy demands for different objects The calculated total energy demands for lighting and other energetic characteristics can be shown for the complete energy evaluation project for each contained utilisation zone each energy evaluation room and for each assessment zone A subdivision in monthly values is also possible for each object Energiebewertung Zusammenfassung Entitat Aah Bigender Warm EM S093 Or Ladansched Langengres 7 E3 Aretengran 41 22 Lrgebre sae Gesamiererger Belewn
13. Welcome dialogue You can set the typical speed of the main user by selecting from four options Please confirm each of your steps by clicking on Next DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 193 DIALux Version 4 4 Illumination Conditions Wizard Typical Speed Enter the typical speed of the main user type Fig 314 Illumination Conditions Wizard Typical Speed Specify the permitted traffic participants in the window Main Users and Other Users Illumination Conditions Wizard Main Users and Other Users Enter the main user type and the other permitted user types i 1 o ait Users are pedestians Winer users are not permitted Main users are pedestrians Motorized traific slow vehicles s 40 kmh and DIcYolets are permthed Fig 315 Illumination Conditions Wizard Main Users and Other Users Afterwards a final dialogue appears with the information of the determined illuminance condition DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 194 DIALux Version 4 4 Illumination Conditions Wizard x Finishing luminance conditions Wizard fou have completed the wizard successfully All of the basic requirements have been calculated for your street illumination Determined Illuminance D4 To exit the wizard and select the calculated illuminance conditions click Finish lt Back Cancel Fig 316 Illumination Conditions Wizard Final dialogue After finishing the wizard DIALux incorporates directly the
14. is only readable because it belongs to an utilisation profile The Factor for Occupancy Control is only readable as well because It is only changed by the selection of With DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 246 DIALux Version 4 4 Occupancy Sensor yes or no For the Occupancy Dependency Factor the same holds as with EN 15193 There are a lot of relations and dependencies between parameters They all have one thing in common the duty of documentation to explain and circumstantiate calculated energy demands Calculation and results When the complete building is subdivided into utilisation zones all energy evaluation rooms are created all assessment zones are determined and all parameters are adjusted then it s time to calculate the energy demands and other energetic characteristics That s the moment when the real energy evaluation is done Ae fewer ive 2 E 1 Angaben kundigureren i Fig 408 Start of an energy evaluation in menu Output You can start the energy evaluation either with Conduct energy evaluation in menu Output or with the icon of the same name 2 Pe AE a baa ATTE Fig 409 Start of an energy evaluation with the icon of the same name second from left In both cases a complete energy evaluation for the whole energy evaluation project is done There s no selection of utilisation zones energy evaluation rooms or assessment zones as known from light p
15. Bo baliran ers Enep hing beo E Pied i 3 D Liias iai ip Pec L Sopher cal Legh rere a Ligh ica j a etter arc m E e ti j tend s ri Orii pg i N i Bardi ire a E e Lite krip TML Crm eee an e jna Fig 182 Property Page of a light scene Light scene The Daylight factors tab enables the determination of the position of the sun for the daylight calculation You have the option to make various settings in the nspector with respect to daylight Activate the checkbox Take daylight into account during calculation that way you include the daylight in your project If the checkbox is deactivated the room is calculated without daylight Individual or all light scenes of a room can be calculated at the same time Pinpek tage Fe Tighe dyka rri dete Gery cebu Fikes aves Dbi paced Co PEG fiom 1J Centre prog rh Control grou Erf Cente geo a Moc i ceing eee a iri 7 B wall GB wai GB wal waa I lure Midd Arr angeemart A Th lane Aa areas E La nemine Freet Parra e Tiaa n a Fig 183 Property Page of a light scene Daylight factors In the Property Page Dimming values the control groups with dimming levels are set in an editable list DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 121 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 184 Property Page of a light scene Dimming values puig Sey te deer vibes of tain lw te Beret het eee emn oF Flume jot Fig
16. Illuminance Class ME4a wizard Additional Illumination Clas x F Vertical Muminance WES F Semi cylindrcal Mun Grid f Automatic Points E Project 1 Fig 328 Calculation Grid Illuminance Class Here you have the option to specify the illuminance class Either the given illuminance class is selected manually from the available list or by using the wizard to determine the illuminance class in according to the European Standard CEN TR 13201 1 The illuminance class contains a summary of the photometric requirements for your project which depends on the visual needs of specific street users using different kinds of traffic surfaces and their environment Additional illuminance classes can be chosen according to street situation for vertical and semicylindrical illuminances q v EN13201 1 chapter 6 4 For valuation fields requiring illuminances rather than luminances it can be necessary within the scope of the norm to calculate each of four illuminances dimensions dependent on the interpretation criteria according to EN13201 2 These are e horizontal illuminance e hemispherical illuminance e semicylindrical illuminance e vertical illuminance Horizontal illuminance is always calculated However in some countries hemispherical illuminance is needed instead of horizontal illuminance Similarly this is always calculated and can be selected in the output for the printout In table 4 of the CEN TR
17. 0 Z Ey Settings Last Projects Opened Fig 115 Import furniture files Extrusion Volumes New to the standard elements is the furniture Extrusion Volume To create an extrusion volume just drag and drop the object into a room or an exterior scene A cube with edge lengths 1m x 1m x 1m is displayed Simultaneously the familiar room editor is shown in the Inspector With this editor you can assign the extrusion DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 81 DIALux Version 4 4 volume any polygonal form you like both numerically by inserting coordinates and graphically by dragging points or lines or by inserting coordinates with right clicks After the extrusion volume s form is defined any extrusion height can be selected An extrusion volume can be rotated combined subtracted or saved as new personal furniture Of course colours and textures can be assigned to the volume s surfaces ai 7 E x i ee oe ae L Le ea M a 9 2 ae gt F E pi L nrs l I Fig 116 Creating an extrusion volume Subtraction of Objects Subtraction of objects is a helpful tool to create complex furniture Similar to room elements subtracting areas from a room you can subtract one or more objects from one other object Objects can be standard elements extrusion volumes furniture or imported SAT objects The resulting object is what remains after the one object is subtracted from all other objects The
18. 185 Property Page of a control group Dimming values The user has the option to make set dimming levels of the used luminaires visible in the CAD view and to edit in the appropriate Property Pages By means of the icons in the menu bar the dimming levels can be switched on and off Also there is the option to change between individual light scenes with the arrows provided that several light scenes exist Lip OPAL oe 4i Room 1 Light scene 2 3D View WD Ge Gat ew CAD pate Luminare Selecton Output Window 2 ay rere n Joron Gi SEGRE BE ae ar Fig 186 Icons for showing dimming values and light scenes in CAD DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 122 DIALux Version 4 4 Tee ja Pre Pre ia Jia orbeacl ial a ETE GA iad af oee oO eo sal im Miabi ere H bmm Dm uai nae i nen SoS rr Pamase TARS ema mr i i ea a Ct pet 3 mim am Fig 187 Viewable dimming values in CAD If luminaires with more than one light output are used the dimming values for each light emitting object LEO can be adjusted separately In the Property Page of the control group tn the lighting scene you can define the dimming values for each LEO This dimming value will be multiplied with the dimming value of the control group Example The control group will be dimmed to 100 In this control group there is a luminaire with independent direct and indirect light output The direct light should be switched off the indirect
19. Brightness preferences In the Brightness preferences tab you can define whether the scene tends to be rather dark or bright Rule of thumb the more luminaires that exist in the project the brighter they becomes as does the scene It would help to test it In addition to the quick settings the DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 263 Glass surfaces should have 15 reflection and 30 transparency DIALux Version 4 4 brightness of the picture can be manipulated freely If there are too dark areas in an image decrease the low_value slightly downwards This will make more details visible were it has been too dark If parts of the image seems to be overexposed the ceiling in a room with only indirect light modify this value upwards to make more details visible x Diari perteence i Inay relresnines bude edad Bagh preferences Manual Bumnation coneckor artesian hi Waki Fite i E bo TA Tig for nergy itn erred Vislues baisan and 1 darken he pchan Mice deta ae rabii in bghter ae Wises ause kitan up the plia More dalak aie eels r de wens Fig 428 POV Ray Brightness preferences Now the new version of the Raytracers POV Ray 3 6 allows the conversion of the light colours trom the control groups so that the rendered image Is shown in colour Raytracing Options for Surfaces You can assign certain options to all surfaces of the room the room elements or the furniture Just select the surfaces and use the Proper
20. Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 300 Startup dialogue DIALux New street project 188 301 Insert Standard Street via Menu 188 302 Insert Standard Street via The Guide 188 303 DIALux wizards Quick street planning wizard 189 304 Wizards Vie Menner a 189 305 Startup dialogue for street light wizard 189 306 Street pProlle aici esta a a eae es 190 307 Valuation Fields and Illumination Classes 190 308 Valuation Fields and Illumination Classes 191 309 Luminaire arrangement ccccceececsseeeeeaeeseeeaes 191 BMG Malays lle fe 02 eater emnenee teeter ne Me rete ures mre ate ay mre rnaTsa tea 192 311 Insert a new standard street 0 0 0 cece cee cess 192 312 Wuminance condito sanaa 193 313 Illumination Conditions Wizard Welcome dialogue PRE EEO Datla Peat dels arsed E tae 193 314 Illumination Conditions Wizard Typical Speed 194 315 Illumination Conditions Wizard Main Users and Other Usetta aAA 194 316 Illumination Conditions Wizard Final dialogue 195 317 Maintenance plan Method ccccecccccceeeeeeeeeeees 195 318 Insert and arrange the street elements
21. Fig 55 Room context menu right click on room After this option has been activated the room s ground plan can be modified individually Relevant changes occur to ground elements and calculation surfaces ST sis Le E e ee ee Ss Ee JM oe eee E E EET i mg T El T a j Ta miie ee SS fan noe a numeric interaction graphic interaction hei n it baba EEs F Fig 56 Room edit mode By clicking on the walls they can be moved interactively within the CAD view parallel to their previous positions Click on the room coordinates to move them to another position in the room as desired Right click on any position on the wall to insert a point at this position via the context menu DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 49 DIALux automatically recognizes whether luminaires are positioned inside or outside the room Calculation surfaces and ground elements can have any polygonal shape DIALux Version 4 4 Apply Cancel 3D Standard view Fe iL Floor Plan gs Level Symbolic F9 I I I I I I I I I I I I I Insert Point I k I I I I I I I I I I I I I Fig 57 Insert a new corner Further room coordinates can be added or deleted in the Property Page by clicking on the corresponding row and selecting nsert Coordinates or Delete Coordinates Then you can enter the coordinates numerically You can also enter the maximum room dimensions via
22. For the classical method the reference application examples are listed which appear in Mr Stockmar article Maintenance factor theory and practise in Licht 6 2003 from table 1 Of course the user can also enter any other value of maintenance factor in the maintenance factor field After choosing a luminaire the user can place it in any arrangement Also there is access to technical details of the luminaire DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 63 DIALux Version 4 4 DLE ice 41 Room i 20 Wess Be Edt Yew CAD Paste Luminaire Selection Gut 0 a re eee D aL fie ty SPER SIR a a H alk Luminaire Mocrting derangement Listepeane DIAL 30S S00 Leuchne Fig 83 Technical data of the placed luminaire Because the luminous flux and the correction factor have an influence on the number of luminaires required these values can be edited here Lip DLALus 4 1 Room i 2b Views UI Ble ER yew CAD Paste Luminaire Seloctonr Duty a tel od A ago E3 ARRE E Ih e OE StuatPont w puu m v PLO EndPom Wo S400 m Yi ao m F K csi umani Total Hew Goth ak Mourning Sumare braun red Hegh abore ponr Ronm Height BM im Winglepisne Heihi TS m Fig 84 Determination of the luminaire number of pieces In DIALux the utilisation factor method is defined by the CIE to determine roughly the right number of luminaires for all luminaire arrangements By using this method the expected initial illumi
23. Generalean n eeds 62 81 Edit room data Maintenance plan method 63 82 Edit room data Selection of a reference value for the maintenance factor o n 63 83 Technical data of the placed luminaire 0 64 84 Determination of the luminaire number of pieces 64 85 Output Maintenance plan ccc cceeeeeeeeeeees 65 86 Selection of the determination of the enlarged maintenance factor o n 66 87 Technical settings of luminaires with different luminous EACE Sie ea cies a te Siena T 66 88 Determination of the number of required luminaires 67 89 Property Page Maintenance factor 68 90 User defined maintenance factors ccccceeeeeeeeees 69 91 Insert another arrangement in the same room 70 92 Show maintenance factors in the CAD via menu 70 93 Icon Show maintenance factors in the CAD 71 94 Menu Edit Edit Maintenance Factors 00066 71 95 Context menu of the luminaire arrangement Edit Maintenance Facto Semaken 71 96 View of the maintenance factors of individual luminaires in the CAD incecrrreerrrrreen 72 97 Export of the maintenance plan ccccccceceeeeeeeees 72 Jor FATON 8 ce ea e a a NTR 73 99 Edit room data ANIQnMent cece cccecceeeeeeeeeees 73 100 Properties of a wall Name cccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeees 74 101 Properties of a wall Material cccceeeeeeees 74 102 Edit rooms Insert room element 75
24. Quick Planning Wizard l x Alignment Specify the alignment of the luminaires in the room i Enter the desired alignment of the luminaires in the room Preview C Jengthways ie ACOs Options may be deactryated to prevent overlapping luminaires If required change the distance between the first row and the left wall lengthways or the first column to the bottom wall across respectively Distance 0 760 m lt Back Fig 27 Working with Wizards Alignment of the luminaires In the Alignment dialogue you can specify the orientation of the luminaires as lengthways or across Quick Planning Wizard f x Finishing the quick planning wizard fou have completed the quick planning wizard successtully You can now edit the created room as usual with Ohaus You could also immediately calculate the room I Immediately calculate created room To exit the wizard click on Finish z Back Cancel Fig 28 Working with Wizards Calculate result Click on the Finish button and DIALux will begin the calculation and afterwards the calculated result will be displayed DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 30 DIALux Version 4 4 i E Ee i Ee eme EO Fig 29 Working with Wizards Visually represented result In order to display the calculated results click in the toolbar on the Single Sheet Output button Afterwards you will see a summary which displays all
25. Street Illumination A standard street can contain several street arrangements of luminaires but no other luminaire arrangements or furniture The va uation field is detined with the first street arrangement To insert the street arrangement you can use The Guide DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 207 DIALux Version 4 4 The Guide Ax Indoor Lighting Outdoor Lighting Street Lighting Edit street aq Insert Standard ame Edit street elements Plan lighting oy Select Luminaires Arrangement am Evaluation E Start Calculation G Output More aM Copy standard street into new exterior scene Fig 340 Insert street arrangement via The Guide or the menu nsert gt Luminaire Arrangement gt Street Arrangement when you have selected the street in the Project manager Ja ea c Ja Barham u oramai ih Sa jajaa awe pE pRO Fig 341 Insert street arrangement via menu or by means of right mouse button after you have picked the street in the Project manager DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 208 DIALux Version 4 4 J n i Fua a m Sim Jini Barh ge a coo ih Fa jjer EEFE Ii ia L na Fig 342 Insert street arrangement via right mouse button DIALux offers all the key parameters for positioning street luminaires To position luminaires first you select the type of luminaire in the manufacturers Plugin Now you use the option nsert Street Arrangement and choose the product trom the luminair
26. Textures Y Lunare c Output Ciscleys che selected output page n a new vando Fig 224 Open the 3D rendering o Start the software that should import the image This might be Word Excel or any image processing software o Click and hold the left mouse button on the 3D output and drag the image to the other program E r ge T lie pe m m p p p H ee ee p gt encea io ao J doarfuarlh Ei AEREI o Bg ia jte eee A PE mra i 7 i Ere eF Li iha b i oe erre F Ap E Pan Fig 225 Copy the 3D rendering into another software o The image is copied into the other software with a resolution of 2000 x 2000 pixel DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 147 DIALux Version 4 4 Presentation of false colour rendering With DIALux the user has the option to display the 3D rendering in a false colour rendering presentation The presentation of illuminance and luminance with freely scaleable value ranges and definable colour gradients is now available oi eo fet ieee be ee o Sid he jaroai i ef faapa at VARI Br T Hle af B mi aj DEG f T i EBLGL ee ee ae 1 a AGATA ro ime ee I T oE SSS SS E s ee a wie ote de E ash Ss a pRO Fig 226 False colour Illuminances m E fins Loon ee A Si at eave a E em faapa mp anme MA aE CETE i i Bisbal wre i i Littiiiti Hey a _ Amh te Sn b E aa Eir Fa
27. a j n ee i en irine ae ee p i Emni eee qe fF F I jp I i 7 cari oa mT di eae Sa 1 aa birus a i al Tee Fi Ca F at Be rs 3 P a F d Fa mi saM Ls jma pma bi E Fig 289 Insert a ground element from the furniture tree via Drag amp Drop You can edit a ground element similar to the rooms see Edit mode They can have any polygonal shape When you enable the option Result Output in the Property Page Calculation Grid DIALux will create the relevant output You can place furniture and luminaires in the same way as in the rooms of an indoor project Ground Elements A ground element can only be used in an exterior scene It is an area with a defined shape and an arbitrary height that may for example differ from the rest of the scene only because of its function m E be g p Leen pe p l Pee S ee ee 29h Uw a el IG Se oo i Pat eer r Birimi i a is i k a ates ir a a ia mm j Ti wt Fis e i Ef im Fa oe ered es h MFE N TE i iis Li Fig 290 A ground element By default a ground element has a rectangular shape and a height of 0 0 m If you modify the height the ground element is extruded consists of a top surface and sides If DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 181 DIALux Version 4 4 you want to modify the shape of the ground element you can switch to the Edit mode with a right click The Inspector shows the different surfaces of the ground element You can change their material independen
28. ak y New Imenor Project YN DlALos Wizards ai 1 y W Hinar Falastin Pru Bs Doon Lisi Project J g Mew Street Project Vises Ugen Propect he Show Ghee dislog af mead program ster Fig 287 Startup dialogue In the startup dialogue you can choose New exterior project and DIALux starts with a new empty exterior scene You can have rooms exterior scenes and street scenes in one project TETTE Ealtit WE E g i ra ee oe Oh aw a parj F E zag FTT I i are eo ae oe eee tall ee i a pil HES j ie Gf bal mm s m m 4 k j a i im 7 7 peee ime r cm rT hh ey es pE ij mj ii E ty aE Pa f 1 a ae g i z j je WF fia ao om ri joa FY Alf mpi ae P Fig 288 Start DIALux 4 2 with a new exterior scene In the Project manager the exterior scene is quite comparable to a room An exterior scene contains ground elements furniture and luminaires The room contains walls floor and ceiling instead of the ground element DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 180 You can insert further ground elements from the furniture tree DIALux Version 4 4 Ground elements have their own photometric properties The calculation results are limited to their surface You can insert additional ground elements from the furniture tree famed I n Ha E j k Lal fae jes pee it m gt at uo A ni S bOe as E i Iip PERT A e ET aa pe m b e j
29. ee ee Fri l es oo f sees T mimi z Vu a ei oe i1 Tice Fii a Ppr a So Brr e ss Fig 132 Help rays for luminaires When you click on this icon a CO arrow red line which indicates the direction of the CO plane and a yellow line degree of light radiation gamma 0 appears at the inserted luminaires The CO planes of the luminaires always show towards the X axis if it wasn t rotated With DIALux you can switch on the 3D Light distribution curve LDC This function is useful to check the correct placement of luminaires with asymmetrical distribution aul Aal m rm Pia ies FS Ren Fe _ Fe Js MEE tals Renee mo ee ee ee ee nm ee ee mjra i i EET me a i i 1 a a Pe nas Serer Fume Famm jam aes ns j p i T a a l imie mie bi BaO Fig 133 Luminaire with 3D LDC DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 93 Set illumination point gt align to Imax DIALux Version 4 4 To show the LDC click on the icon 3D Light Distribution Display or select the menu View gt 3D Light Distribution Display In DIALux the alignment of luminaires is improved with the function Set illumination point which allows you to align the yellow help ray gamma 0 with any point on a selected surface The alignment of luminaires has further been simplified in DIALux Beside the function of the alignment of th
30. i ias a Subp Lor eani 1E I ngia md Bie kpt erre her fa LE a E E z EE Fated Ama ETE Einsi ims g pore ree S i Ai iT Tem Pa Bigh foo oom 7 Ay bere rey wa e aah i Lai A immi m ain imal ET coef m a ee Ti x Pema z A ai il m j ill J G wey m hre Di a E di E sdi E wat 2 hae og er o ine freer i mj Soiree T hy Fak ere r T n as Fret hae ap tecture Fiam ture a Trimi Femi pyon fim rey Fig 189 Duplicate light scene or control group The function of brightness distribution in the calculated room can be accessed in the menu File gt Settings gt Adjust Brightness DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 124 DIALux Version 4 4 _y DIAL 4 1 Room i Light scene 1 30 Yie i be be Yer Joga jis Protect ree fas of ET fg Triad View l ieee Plan 2 7 Level Symbok a s Papit ini Y T Leri A eb kayas for Lures GH I Lht Diribunen Diepiiy Fig 190 Adjust brightness via menu or in the context menu within the CAD window joom 1 ught scene 1 30 view eoon 1 Light scene 1 Floor pian f irei r En Dii Ea noon Geometry E 20 Sardard Yer ru Ge Eker Pan pin Level Speke Pa Sante Lae vy Homo camma yn P mio ait Miz JA edi Siam 670m pomm HM Fig 191 Adjust brightness CAD window The Property Page Brightness allows the setting of the brightness distribution in the room After you have shifted the brightness co
31. ral Chaat PERERA lt 5 DIAL Ghahi achia Wha h r no are wou boing for Aybele fumber Baruflichurer Dial Aufawitohler al TiAl DAL Lipkin Liminar Huma Luring Type divekestrahlesd SLSELecet Laipe bIterecl Bethy lane Fig 40 The User Database Use the mport button to transfer luminaires to the User Database One or several ULD dt Eulumdat ies or cib files can be imported from any desired directory If a luminaire has been imported into the project i e it appears in the luminaire list it can be copied to the user database via a right click DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 38 DIALux Version 4 4 Insert Luminaire Files into DIALux Faj Folders ET P Search We Folders E Ea x ie HoFOO1 ldt 1 KE Eulumdat File E HOFOL1 LDT 1 KE Eulumdat File Setti ER HOFO14 LDT 1 KE Eulumdat File 1 KE Eulumdat File Insert into DIALux Project 1 KE Eulumdat File les D He Insert into Gwn Dl4Lux Database yplicat ce HC Open With 1 KE Eulumdat File 0 1c sae i KE Eulumdat File i D HE Send To LKB Eulumdat File HC cue 1 KE Eulumdat File BB Hc IKB Eulumdat File Copy CE e 1KB Eulumdat File Fre EB HE Create Shortcut 1EB Evlumdat File Bin BS Ho Delete 1 KE Eulumdat File SHO Rename 1 KE Eulumdat File help amp HC 1 KE Eulumdat Fil mg Properties ae ae Ldt 1 KE Eulumdat File TEREE d HAFA MT 1 EFR Fiilirmdat File Fig 4
32. 13201 1 the alternative A classes are specified for the S classes Accordingly DIALux changes the necessary illuminance dimensions in the outputs Horizontal illuminance Calculation points shall be located in a plane at ground level in the relevant area DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 201 DIALux Version 4 4 Hemispherical illuminance Calculation points shall be located in a plane at ground level in the relevant area Semicylindrical illuminance Calculation points shall be located in a plane 1 5m above the surface in the relevant area Semicylindrical illuminance varies with the direction of interest The vertical plane at right angles to the rear flat surface shall be oriented parallel to the main directions of pedestrian movement which for a road is usually longitudinal Vertical illuminance Calculation points shall be located in a plane 1 5m above the surface in the relevant area Vertical illuminance varies with the direction of interest The vertical illumination plane shall be oriented at right angles to the main directions of pedestrian movement which for a road are usually up and down the road You can activate the wizard for the determination of an illumination class via the wizard button see figure 178 After starting it you are welcomed by a welcome screen NOTE The single steps to the calculation of an illuminance class by means of the wizard depend in each case on the kind of marked street element T
33. 228 Basic DWG DXF Settings and Layer Selection 228 Edit a Room based on the DWG DXF Ground Plan PAEO EA E EAE EEE A PEE E EAE 229 Working with the DWG DXF Background in the 3D VION aa T E A 230 DWG OFA OO lil mirria a a 231 Energy Performance of Buildings cccceecceeeeeaes 2353 Background information ints is axa ctecoti sa Stan renieted te wents 233 Why energy evaluation in DIALUX eee 234 Structure of an energy evaluation project 235 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 7 DIALux Version 4 4 Energy evaluation rooms with links to DIALux rooms ALO BR WiO U eain ane teen i ene eve ee Ser ners evE ere 240 Working ON parameters cccccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 244 Calculation and results ccccccceccccceeeececeeeeeeeeens 247 Documentation of energy evaluation results 249 SLE Wale aCe E E ENE aaah eae 252 Making videos in DIAL UK nc wien ats saetiaeeveld tiadaads teal 252 Raya een aO cairn tances 258 BAC OUN aaa aii E E EEE 258 POV Ray Settings within DIALUX ccceeeeeeees 258 Photo Realistic Images with Raytracing 06 258 Ba ESENG oean Cede aca titers tu tetecen ada 258 Quick PIETER ENCES itornsnccnssecumasnenseanniduetiosdetoneducinantas 259 Mage peice E 2 25 cate a ene 201 NGINOCT CaCulati Oien in inleh autecaensa name alee 261 Brightness preferences 263 Raytracing Options for Surfaces ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 264 3 D Standard Vi
34. 4 4 Modity the geometry of the cube in such a way that it corresponds to a bottom shelf by using the Property Jal LE a E i ee G By se Er Se oe LIS i e ELP Fig 110 Create furniture Modify the dimensions Subsequently you can copy the bottom shelf and move it to the desired position Possibly the height Z axis will need modifying a aba E omen Abo el dhirine b Cory Along alins E til Fig 111 Create furniture Copy Afterwards you can generate the side panels and position them correctly Subsequently select all side panels and shelves and combine them via the right mouse button Combining is very important particularly for the calculation Otherwise DIALux will include each surface into the calculation even those surfaces which are actually covered and no longer visible DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 79 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 112 Create furniture Combine You can save furniture by using the context menu File gt Export function gt Save Furniture That way it is possible to use furniture in another project again n abi aie ESE j Se es fi w ana jakid E i J as a OT Be Ble a ewe cea Aol Hie aa A S F TITE EERIE ie Ls ane ES thi hit amp P 77 0u0nEunnE j i il Se 1a mEt a Fig 113 Create furniture Export furniture Now you can see your saved furniture in the furniture tree if necessary this must be
35. 4 4 Tab 1 Sky types according to CIE 110 1994 fF Overcast Sky Averaged Sky Clear Sky CIE Name Overcast Sky Complete Overcast Sky rotationally symmetrical Description luminance distribution Light Scenes possible Number of possible zenith luminance In DIALux used zenith luminance ESES Averaged Intermediate Sky Developed by Nakamura Oki et al Developed from a long period of measurements described average weather conditions Clear Sky Cloudless Sky Krochmann DIALux offers the possibility to define light scenes in a project For this a light scene is inserted within the room or the exterior scene by right click or insert menu In light scenes luminaires can be provided individually or as control groups with dimming levels Likewise a daylight situation can be defined Me semitone Light rene Dmi itas Hmi values au urvarsbande a ross cand rma i Contre geson 7 I Perec oy Lier Lhe Y 2a DIA jii titahe Foon Workplan aj Light coerce Ca Ugh seer el Daria ie a Og Unghie aot 2 9 Cort Ga Es Lanta arin Egi Carer ari E el Plea e Cedi BL Wed ues i j lutin o Mipreject Arbre deters Lumrare j Carpet DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 138 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 210 Specify dimming values of the control group To accomplish a daylight calculation a light scene must exist in the room Daylight calculation If a project
36. Arrangement Wizard gt Field Arrangement option If you select a room and then perform a right click the context menu for that room opens Here you can also select the Insert gt Field Arrangement option The Wizard sequentially queries all important parameters that must be entered If you use one of the options with which the luminaire field is entered manually the nspector displays in addition to the luminaire field a Paste and a Cancel button ee ee ees FEDE j praz apan eM eT Lamme ar pme j nw preen bima i F we PT i Tm Perr p ep ae 5 Fig 137 Insert luminaire fields without wizard DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 95 New in DIALux 4 2 Selection of rotatable luminaire parts DIALux Version 4 4 Until you click Paste only the rubber band indicating the field arrangement is visible You can modify all parameters in the Property Pages before or after inserting the field To edit a luminaire field select it in the tree or in the CAD view If you click on a luminaire in the field all luminaires in the field are selected by default If you wish to edit individual luminaires you first have to change the selection filter see Fig 135 The following filters can be selected from left e Allow or restrict the selection of luminaire arrangements e Allow or restrict the selection of individual luminaires within an arrangement e Allow or restrict the selection of rotatable luminaire pa
37. As 6 We Fig 348 Street arrangement Optimise arrangement The luminaire arrangement always defines the valuation field If you insert several luminaire arrangements the resulting valuation field depends on each case of the maximum pole distance between two luminaires shown in the following example see Fig 349 The luminaires of the lower arrangement therefore specify the calculation field Pal ae Lc E e hh ieee EE EE T EFT a fan si f pi panj 2 SRY el Bell jea s i ramie ham r in CET EE T EF TE i E mm 1p 1 5 a In 1E a te me ae s m eee Pe a a CELEI e ae Fig 349 Calculation field in the ground plan view The starting point of the arrangement relatively to the calculation field can be changed under Pole Arrangement gt Longitudinal The nspector provides technical data on the inserted luminaire arrangement see chapter Luminaire Arrangement DIALux displays the street in 2D and in 3D view just like rooms and exterior scenes DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 213 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 350 3D visualisation of the street You can rotate Zoom and roam the 3D view and export it as jpg like all other scenes Note The rendering shows the distribution of the illuminance but not the luminance teal Egi Fi om Pa jE Ts Fi g 351 2D visualisation of the street In the floor plan view DIALux also shows the valuation field calcul
38. Bie a a Fi ra p m eeiam iBA m g ee A m le lf L ii a j w n n EE a a D i m a i sa Fa TT pa e aus Baa a ELEL Ga a a aa l pme Fis ma Fic ba a ee F ami Ge meia d eo ee ee ee bee DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 126 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 194 Export of light scenes DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 127 DIALux Version 4 4 Emergency lighting Global Emergency lighting can be calculated according to the European standard EN1838 In the introduction of the standard EN 1838 on page 2 it Is stated that only the direct light has to be taken into account and not the reflected indirect component for the calculation of the emergency lighting scene Also the special regulation of the Lighting Guide 12 LG12 from the SLL in the UK that the first reflection of direct light onto a ceiling Is selectable for the calculation In DIALux additional calculation methods are required for escape route lighting and open area lighting Emergency Lighting de Emergency p standby Escape Lighting Lighting Escape Open Area High Risk route Lighting Task Area Lighting Anti Panic Lighting Fig 195 Types of emergency lighting Standby lighting is calculated like a regular lighting design The option to do an emergency escape lighting design is available when a lighting scheme is inserted into a DIALux project and it is set t
39. Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 394 Display of assessment zones in CAD windows second icon from the left 238 395 Display of assessment zones of an energy evaluation LOOM IN BSD WOW ieten a AIE 239 396 Energy evaluation in The Guide ccccceeeeeeee 240 397 Create an energy evaluation room with a link to a DIALUX TOOM isn a a 240 398 Create an energy evaluation room without a link to a DIA LUX TOONA beinere iaia Aa abi 241 399 Energy evaluation rooms with and without link to DIALUX TOOM S norci a 241 400 Possibility to change the linked DIALux room for an energy evaluation fOOM cccceeceeeeeeeeees 242 401 Possibility to cancel the link of an energy evaluation room to a DIALUX TOOMNS cointrctcccveotadetuielaldeds 243 402 Working on the assessment zone of an unlinked energy evaluation fOOM ccceeeceeeeeeeeeee 244 403 Utilisation profile of an utilisation zone in a planning according to DIN 18599 a e 245 404 One property page of a daylight supplied assessment ZONE ole e a E 245 405 Property pages for assessment zones that are daylight supplied by windows respectively roof lights 245 406 Direct input of energy consumption values in unlinked energy evaluation rOOMS cccccceeeeeeeeeee 246 407 Occupancy parameters of an assessment zone in EN 15193 left and in DIN 18599 right 246 408 Start of an en
40. Framing Factor Wooden window fied z fo A5 wooden window Fined Plastic window fixed Metal window to oper Metal window fied q Skylight with bars Fig 213 Edit daylight factors Of course all the important parameters can be defined for windows and skylights As usual DIALux already includes a selection of the most current choices Projektmanager pa Daylight factors Dimming values M Take daylight into account during calculation T Calculate Daylight quotient orn La Date 21 03 2005 Time 10 28 00 Sky Model Clear sky af M Direct sun light E a Project 1 H iy Luminaires Used Room 1 iuan d workplane a 2 Light scenes F rA Elan scene 1 oe Fa Control group 1 H Light scene 2 Fig 214 Daylight factors To calculate a light scene with daylight the necessary calculation options must be put in the light scene If the checkbox Calculate Daylight quotient is activated the settings are made accordingly Sky model of overcast sky Nosun No consideration possibly of available luminaires As a result you get as usual a calculation including visualization and in this case the output of the daylight quotient as a component of the work plane If you want to know the daylight quotient at other positions you can insert suitable calculation surfaces or calculation points In the following figure the value chart of the work plane is displayed Currently beta version it do
41. L Tiles E L Wood L Linoleum glk Fitted carpet L Ceiling L Window or Furniture L Doors e L Wall ELE Colours E L Light colours LE Colour filter A Used Textures Fig 45 The Colour tree When you select a texture in the texture tree the Inspector shows a preview of it After the import the reflection is calculated according to the RGB values of the texture You may modify this value later It is important to specify the real size of the texture The default value is 1 x 1m If you take a photo for example of a building s facade and import this photo as a texture you have to enter the real size of the building length and height After you drag a texture onto a surface you may modity it scale rotate Once a texture is placed on a surface you can flip mirror it by entering a negative length e g 0 4m This will only be used for the selected surface DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 43 Please note The Output button in the Guide and the Output tab open the output tree DIALux Version 4 4 The Output Tree Yet another tree structure exists for the output selection You can open it by clicking on the Output tab in the Project manager Ea Output Fig 46 Output Tab or by selecting the icon in The Guide Outputs whose page icon is highlighted are immediately available The output types which are not highlighted can only be obtained after the calculation has
42. Room 2 Emergency Lighting Select All All with Furniture All with luminaires Cancel Selection All without Furniture Al without luminaries Calculation options Standard recommended calculation very accurate longer calculation time Calculation method Automatic Standard great memory requirements Alternative low memory requirements somewhat slower DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 134 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 206 Calculation dialogue Without furniture Those luminaires which are in use for emergency lighting are marked with the expression emergency luminaire af H Ekun ee fie Pee y Te J Fig 207 Emergency luminaires in the CAD view High risk task area lighting For the high risk task area lighting you can use the regular task area calculation surface of DIALux It contains of the task area s and the surrounding area The calculation surface will be calculated in the emergency lighting scheme as well as the other calculation surfaces Luminaires with emergency lights A luminaire can transfer the information of several light emitting objects These LEO can also be defined as emergency LEO These emergency LEOs are only used for the emergency lighting calculation From version 4 2 of DIALux these emergency LEOs will be used by DIALux for the emergency lighting calculation A regular LEO can also be used for the emergency calculation Often normal lumi
43. along the escape route This should be performed regardless of whether it is an emergency escape route or an open anti panic area As seen in this visualisation the manufacturer can use real 3D models for the visualisation of its luminaires Eim pE pE pmi Leman ei CIETE T E E ees ET E jia ay af 94 Ss Ee i Bte i ee en a oe Flee i fhe Jri Fe F iamm i f pai OEA l LHEs LAIR mma GE Fig 202 Escape route lighting Visualisation Open area lighting anti panic Open area lighting can be automatically prepared by inserting an emergency lighting scene In the Property Page for the lighting scheme there is a button to insert anti panic calculation surfaces on each piece of floor in the room even if the floor is tilted or consist of areas DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 132 DIALux Version 4 4 in different heights The geometry is copied from the floor minus 0 5m from the walls It is also possible to edit the surfaces manually Apg parapen a EL EFT a asira i ja praz Meela m A E uasai mr DEEG 4 3f hi a Tt Mca Med pe a at amai m hdd amii oo eee amare mies tit oe i TE pape ame a ar Laer greg Era r r vi Pg i 1 j tem fey fev FY es Vn Pie ce Fig 203 Open area lighting The way to insert an open area luminaire arrangement is similar to that in the escape route lighting A right click on the open area calculation surface opens th
44. and you can fix the illuminance conditions The illuminance conditions can be entered manually or determined by means of the wizard By default your street project always gets an illuminance condition with the designation A1 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 192 DIALux Version 4 4 Projektmanager General Maintenance plan method Hame Street 1 Description lllumnance Conditions wizard E Project 1 oy Luminaires Used Ela Street 1 cae Roadway 1 Fig 312 Illuminance conditions The illuminance condition is based on the Technical Report of the European committee for standardisation CEN TR 13201 1 It serves as a basis for the definition of requirements for the street illumination By means of a wizard the respective illuminance condition of the street can be determined systematically The illumination condition wizard can be started using the Wizard button see Fig 312 Illumination Conditions Wizard Illumination Conditions Wizard x Welcome to the Illumination Conditions Wizard This wizard helps you to collect information on the street users in a step by step manner 4t the end the illumination conditions are determined and this serves as the basis for defining the street lighting The wizard i based on the prCEN TR 13201 1 technical report from the European Committee for Standardisation To continue click Next Back Cancel Fig 313 Illumination Conditions Wizard
45. arrangement To be able to select individual luminaires within an arrangement the selection filter must be set accordingly Selection filter kh EHS Alon Restrict Single Luminaire Selection Fig 148 Selection filter for CAD selection The fourth icon from the right enables the selection of individual luminaires within an arrangement NOTE A single luminaire is an individual luminaire arrangement Inserting Luminaire Circles At the moment no wizard for positioning luminaire circle arrangements Is available The options are very similar to those already described Additionally we would like to point out the Start Angle and End Angle options DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 101 DIALux Version 4 4 Jal Wi oT E E N TIELE E ja aa mekeme peA ar E ERETTE T inim a pil EEJ l bme ie Se ee Be on ou i i ia ak E rH d Eo E ot hr p isim ji i Heart E Li a 1 a Bme ee n aj ar fe im Fos an Som fim Jimi dm ii jii i 3135 mi GEH Fig 149 Luminaire circle start and end angle When the start angle is 0 the first luminaire is positioned to the right of the mid point at distance r on a straight line which is parallel to the X axis Positive angles gt 0 are created counter clockwise If the individual luminaires are not rotated the CO level of each luminaire radiates outward Separating Luminaire Arrangements An inserted luminaire arrangement can be separated into individual luminaires b
46. bearbeiten nur DIN 18599 Bearbeiten Sie die Eigenschaften der erzeugten Bewertungsbereiche Markieren Sie dazu einen oder mehrere Bereiche im Projektbaum und editieren Sie deren Eigenschaften im Inspektor 4 Energiebewertung durchf hren i Ausgaben Fig 396 Energy evaluation in The Guide Energy evaluation rooms with links to DIALux rooms and without As mentioned before you can create energy evaluation rooms with a link to a DIALux room but also without such a link E Frojekt 1 oly verwendete Leuchten E Energiebewertung gt Rs i ie Raumgeometrie bearbeiten Tageslichtverbauung bearbeiten Lichtszene einf gen FTT 5 teuergruppe einf gen Fa W Einf gen Energiebewertungsraum erzeugen EO Fig 397 Create an energy evaluation room with a link to a DIALux room DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 240 DIALux Version 4 4 Sl Q Projekt 1 af Zone 1 BA Zone Zone a Raum 1 nergiebewertungsraum ohne Verkn pfung zu einen DIALUx Raum einf gen H Raum 3 fbi Umbenennen Fig 398 Create an energy evaluation room without a link to a DIALux room In the first case an energy evaluation room is created that is linked to the corresponding DIALux room In the second case an energy evaluation room is created that is not linked to any DIALux room fame und Descrebung Allgemein fare und ekien Migemein Enpe uean ohne Verir 2 eres 7 Bnerpiebewe grum
47. certain amount of luminaires in a line in front and behind a single calculation point the new calculation surface considers all luminaires in the exterior scene even luminaires with other tasks Street yaluation field Fig 297 Calculation surface Street valuation field A Street Valuation Field consists of two parts the calculation surface itself and a corresponding observer The surface is visible in CAD windows and can be changed as needed It can even be polygonal The observer position and his viewing direction define the calculation grid of the surface This grid is displayed by little crosses in the CAD Grid point counts are able to be changed initially there are 10 x 3 grid points Initially the observer is placed 60 m to the left from the start of the surface This is the observer position in a standard street The position can be changed as needed His viewing direction is 0 that is in direction of the positive X axis Therefore the grid points are initially parallel to the X axis as well DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 186 DIALux Version 4 4 zo e Observer Beobachter X Calculation point Berechnungspunkt Luminaire Leuchte Fig 298 Simple Street valuation field in an exterior scene Xm amp e Observer Beobachter X Calculation point Berechnungspunkt Luminaire Leuchte Fig 299 Complex Street valuation field in an exterior scene The first graphic shows a simple ex
48. control group Context menu of the room rer eee re E ere eee rere eee er ore er 118 177 Paste a control group Context menu in the CAD WIGW EAE EA O E 118 178 Property Page of a control group 119 179 Insert a light scene via MANU ccc ccccccee ee eeeeeees 119 180 Context menu of the room Insert a light scene 120 181 Context menu control group Add to light scene 120 182 Property Page of a light scene Light scene 121 183 Property Page of a light scene Daylight factors 121 184 Property Page of a light scene Dimming values 122 185 Property Page of a control group Dimming values sided isin De et aaa ea tele Paice ine Toate ETET es 122 186 Icons for showing dimming values and light scenes in CAD aosa E 122 187 Viewable dimming values in CAD ccceeeeeeee 123 188 Dimming individual light outputs separately 124 189 Duplicate light scene or control group 124 190 Adjust brightness Vid M NU cccccsseeceereeneeees 125 191 Adjust brightness CAD window ceeee 125 192 Brightness control for 3D rendering ccc 126 193 Extended SCHINGS 24ncii A a ia 126 19A EXDOrn OF MONES CENE S soot cies ates AEE ER 127 195 Types of emergency lighting aicicic tied teeta 128 196 Emergency lighting SCENE eessssiiieeessriinennenn 129 197 Property Page of emergency lighting 0 129 198 Output Emergency light
49. displayed or not To switch between this modes press the glasses icon with the help line on it p gt FOA Sr r e Tf Pee Fig 262 Display help lines DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 166 DIALux Version 4 4 Poly help lines A poly line is working like a simple help line but instead of defining just a start and end point there can be any number of vertices in between The line between vertices is always straight forward Each left click defines a new vertex To stop the poly line mode press the ESCAPE key or make a right click In the context menu you can choose between closing the line between first and last point or just stop the mode at the last vertex p ee ee dm ae Fig 263 Insert a poly line stop the mode with a right click In the inspector each vertex can be changed numerically and by ticking the checkbox the poly line can be closed To move the complete poly line after it is defined once hold down the ALT key while the mouse is above one vertex and holding down the left mouse button ge i em dm ae __ Ch A l k C Fig 264 Move the complete poly line by holding down the ALT key Spline help line The spline help line can be placed like the poly help line The lines between the vertices are not straight but curved to follow a smooth line between the vertices In the start and end point there are draggers which can be used to change the line towards the start an
50. factor fo s0 Reference Please select an application e Extended EN 12464 Ambient conditions Mormal Maintenance Annually Semi annuall Annually Every 1 5 years Eyer 2 0 years Every 2 5 years Ei Project 1 Fs Luminaires Used El Room 1 Fig 86 Selection of the determination of the enlarged maintenance factor For the room or the exterior scene the ambient condition is chosen Here the user can select beside three given situations clean normal and polluted very clean which appears in the Trilux book Planning help 12464 Next you pick the room maintenance interval After the selection of a luminaire the user can place this in any arrangement You also have access to technical details of the luminaire This Property Page is identical with the one associated with the easy method LS DIALux 4 1 Room 1 Floor plan al File Edit wiew CAD Paste Luminaire Selection Gutpi D gala eee p F L Erme Ol Gh lls Projektmanager al Luminaire Maintenance Factor Luminaire WILA 1138 53 Sentic pendant luminaire T Lamp IT 16 Luminous Elus fi fol Irn Power Correction Correction Bowe cat Fig 87 Technical settings of luminaires with different luminous emittances If you use a luminaire with several different luminaire emittances LEO Light Emitting Object you can set each LEO lamp choice and correction factor DIAL GmbH L denscheid pag
51. grid settings Angle Pick ceeeeeeeeeee 155 241 Pick grid settings Colours of the Pick grids 156 242 ROAN OBJECTS ie a E E ee ieee 156 243 OD EC COMEX INEN syeicennscecuuadscnaconivetaesnacteudtas 157 24A OMAOIMING OD ECS aian E nails 157 245 Specify the coordinate origin eener 158 246 Coordinate origin which was moved outside the cube E E E EE E E E et AA EET 159 247 Resetting the rotation of the origin of an object or TUTTO E reena onea ana 159 DAS EAN UN C E a a cat ea teas 160 249 Calculating grid and furniture surface output 160 250 Selecting a single surface with the mouse 161 251 The tape measure ICON 0 ec cece cee eeeeeccceeeeeeeeneeeeees 162 252 The tape measure function in the ground plan view SSeS abies EEEE A E EEA Sint ET 162 253 The tape measure function in the 3D view 162 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 288 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 254 Fixed grid with a spacing of 0 5m in X and Y IN GOI rection he ae ere te 163 255 Automatically by the walls generated temporary help LOSS ciety Reeth E E EA T Ge tiie 164 256 Automatically by an object generated temporary help E ae E A A 164 2
52. i a bari qaa paani ra Es ae ki Jj e ts ee ama Po ber r be TF EHA H ir Ee Fea he ae FR pirata Tb SA DU p M F m aria Flas igina ow bel pii ee a n a M commen l Pa E ee et ee im ines Cs E L be ard ae OL BAN pemp J F rm Edi hh ni Aerer Fu Wott riihi me ee m rmm boom T Pre birr mh T eee her n ten aes l r i p eae a ar Fo v pej D mmg Tma mew Bey i kft COLE irem miry i Bire mra de erp Lighting a ee Lhew lige Tasma Sir hee LEG te oP pa an cf ain B i me ima ER Fig 48 Save a 3D rendering as jpg file The Guide The connecting element which guides ou through the ar The Guide The Guide accesses all work steps required for the planning It provides a connecting thread and helps you achieve your aims quickly The Guide a x Click on the button to get all options Click on an icon the corresponding op tion is accessed 3 insert Orce Arrangement Calculation objects d Insert calculation sirf aces Insert calculation points Outdoor Lighting Street Lighting Light scenes Emergency Lighting Daylight 2 608 mi 0 000 mi NUM Fig 49 The Guide DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 45 New in DIALux 4 2 Display Guide window The Inspector The Inspector displays the Property Pages which contain the properties of the selected object here Room 1 DIALux Version 4 4 If you click on an icon in The Guide the corresponding option
53. ibiga epee aber ba fla imire eien Pets mech r fork Jems e Fig 43 DIALux lamp demo database The user can insert one or more lamps to the luminaire So it is possible to mix up spot and flood reflectors in a DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 40 DIALux Version 4 4 line of spotlights or it is possible to mix the light colours within the some arrangement The selected lamp can be added to the original equipment or it can replace it DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 41 Create your own tree structure In the furniture tree DIALux shows all directories and SAT files under C documents and setting All Users Aplication data DIALux furniture DIALux Version 4 4 The Furniture Tree Furniture can be moved from the furniture tree to the project any view via the mouse using drag and drop Ham F biti alan Ha a ial mi f aT wY T TA Te EN Dite accesaorles ls a ine giai lo pi ot a inta a CAD mrke K Fig Charl PS Sled oe Pe a z I Aaen dansani Jj Windoes md doo a Exboier e chee Pen Che l Lips i Tiesha j T O Celia iresi A Daan pani Pe ume Pees i FS Orien i mi Gha 42 m Care Pa He pi GMs krii FS Pumie PY Perse F Pork i FS Senter Hi T oo m Share TFT ETER FFT etree we br pee bi Nola en acral Mi ism E Fig 44 The Furniture tree The furniture tree is divided into seven subdirectories You can move the pr
54. illuminance condition in your street project The wizard has already considered which kind of roadway element you have selected For example typical requirements of the roadway do not appear with a sidewalk The user has the option to determine the maintenance factor in the Property Page maintenance plan method Lg labo 4 1 Street 1 ioar plan bee gk yew caD pmte Lumines Selnetinn Qip dw 2 EEEa E 4 o oLa pa T2198 a Ril iea le Strect 1 Floor pl Mnirteramce hector Pian arinari ne apperation a E Propet 1 Sy luminaires Lined Hag reat E gl hordany i Fig 317 Maintenance plan method A standard street may contain certain street elements which you can add sort or delete in the Property Page Arrangement To sort the street elements e g sidewalk bicycle lane lay by you can select one of these and use the Up or Down buttons see Fig 318 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 195 DIALux Version 4 4 _g CLALine 4 1 Street i Floor plan b Ee Yew CAD pase Lummaredeiection gpt Windew 2 dg digarkis 97 Pen Geis BS Gs REGREO BEG lt E a Prabktmenewer Streeti Mloorplan A cij E g Peur TEE eE T i pie f F 3 FA wh Lire Lee g Street af tarir Fig 318 Insert and arrange the street elements Optionally you can insert street elements in the menu Paste gt Street Element E DIALux 4 1 Street 1 Floor plan L Fil
55. in the output tree DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 220 DIALux Version 4 4 ee a he p ETF s j npss l l Jsxaz aisem Ej ile al 7 COB Gaz eff S j e te M TE pensam es Pi dig FY HEpa EFi mEt ER Fig 361 Limit result output Output Settings For many output types further settings can be specified Select the respective output in the output tree and change the settings in the corresponding Property Page in the Inspector he E pe OF fe paa p e EPES a jarioa i ja Jiang i Pets 65en f oe Ree j laienes erh ind Fig 362 Output settings If you change the settings the Refresh View button is activated If you use this button the changes entered are applied in the output window The 3D rendering is generated using the observer position set in the CAD DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 221 Fixing the calculation grid in the output DIALux Version 4 4 aims ii Views E TO Hrne n Fig 363 3D CAD at the top left for editing purposes and 3D rendering as output at the bottom right New Output in DIALux DIALux offers several new or enhanced output types since DIALux 4 Most of them refer to the new light controls Thus there are suitable outputs for control groups and light scenes These outputs are similar to the present outputs of other rooms The calculation grid is fixed in DIALux in the outputs Open in the output tree the summary of a light scene and select the
56. in the DIALux colour tree 00 109 163 Colour information for a selected spectrum 109 164 Colour rendering indices of the CIE test colours CIE E EE ene EE Prt ae me Pn ee ate OO ee 110 165 Spectra and colour rendering properties of different HORTS OUT E oaa a 110 166 Drag and Drop of a spectrum onto a luminaire with rotatable elements 111 167 Drag and drop of a filter spectrum while holding down the control KEY sscrecscieessiautecesecateees tens 112 168 Drag and drop of a spectrum filter on a rotatable element of a luminaire while holding down the SAUE Yn ERE en eRe eae ee errr ee ree eee eet 112 169 Spectrum of the lamp the filter and the resulting radiation Click on the triangle on the bottom right to get TNE Ra values scsurccmrcnirdunacdwress 113 170 Technical information of colour filter 114 171 Resulting spectrum of a luminaire with two times the same filter but different light sources 114 172 All the spots are using the same colour filter but have different light sources From the left Incandescent Flourescent 830 D65 high pressure sodium metal halide ceramic and metal halide quartz 115 173 Four identical photos using different values for the white balance Source wikipedia foto Thomas SEINO earen TN AEGAN 115 174 Adjusting the white balance c ce cceeeeeeeeee 116 175 Paste a control group via MENU ccc cece eeeeeeeee 118 176 Paste a
57. is started the global position must be defined first Projektmanager Project Contact Address Details Location Location L denscheid Length r63 Save Width jst 22 Remove Time f h deviation from GhT lf Summertime from 27 03 to 3010 E Project 1 Fig 211 Select the location Here the user can select any location DIALux offers a very long list of places on all continents so that the inputs are already filled for longitude and latitude as well as time zone Other places can be added arbitrarily Pp iet l Gei l biih plan tia 1 Mei Sarl antes Alegre a E e Luau m Lied i Bese Eip S a ies Gy Light e gr Contedl group P Og Light arene 3 Central poe H phy Contra gees N eh Conia rout i Pheer B cai EE Ti E humr Tia aui Er Textures F breee qJ Gap Fig 212 North alignment The north direction can be defined in each case for the room or the exterior scene To recognize this easily the north arrow is drawn near the coordinate origin In the room windows or skylights must be included in the plan as before These can be easily placed as a line or field if one uses Copy along a line function DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 139 DIALux Version 4 4 Projektmanager General Position Size Daylight factors Material Texture a gt Degree of Transmission Typical Glass Material fao 2 Pollution Factor Typical Environment Pollution fioo
58. l o Tem ae Fig 92 Show maintenance factors in the CAD via menu DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 70 DIALux Version 4 4 ta eS SS ee eT ee re a Jm edee es ia GEE EJ Seg b Fig 93 Icon Show maintenance factors in the CAD The user has the ability to edit the maintenance factors from the menu Edit sjua pe e e haat m eri irarri pa efaz El EE E EEEE al z Ce ee wii i rast F ies ia oe temi Fig 94 Menu Edit Edit Maintenance Factors or in the context menu of the luminaire arrangement j lE E he awe be Pe haa at ai to Peaeden soe Ee fa a ETE E gt VEE A Bs EE LETETTE al A r a ammm a em temi I mi gt i k sees ok as og d E CO ae st pHa a pA Fig 95 Context menu of the luminaire arrangement Edit Maintenance Factors DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 71 DIALux Version 4 4 Also in the floor plan the ascertained maintenance factors can be shown Perhaps more importantly the output Maintenance Plan is added as a new output in DIALux Fig 96 View of the maintenance factors of individual luminaires in the CAD With DIALux it is possible to save the maintenance plan as a RTF Tile Be EE pe p ee ee i oe a Jeaden sos He pa praz Cl m subleases Geeae T r Laf zu eee ios Me sted ee e i TE hee CA e om i i Se F im JF Te oe Gh bhh nmn Fig 97 Export of the maintenance plan In the Room Surfaces tab yo
59. light should be completely on Settings Dimmingvalue of the control group 100 Light output direct 0 Total 100 x 0 0 Light output indirect 100 Total 100 x 100 100 If the indirect light should be dimmed to 50 you can either dim the control group or the LEO Either Total 50 x 100 50 Or Total 100 x 50 50 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 123 DIALux Version 4 4 Projektmanager i Dimming values Total dimming value 100 0 Spedfy the dimming values of the luminaire that are in this control group Oy Lx TobiasGrau FM12 2 EMMA TRIO brass OY 1x TobiasGrau BG41 0 AGATHE CHILD alu pol S Ox DIAL 3B5 900 Leuchte l h Room 1 Ld Workplane Light scenes E Ca Light scene 1 a Control group 1 B Control groups L2 Control group 1 iF aj EP aji fi 5 1 i aji Fig 188 Dimming individual light outputs separately If no light scene is inserted in the room only the room is calculated as before Modify light scenes and control groups You have the potential to duplicate light scenes as well as control groups In this manner the task is made easier for you if the same lights with different dimming levels are to be used You can find this function in the context menu of the light scene or control group al Ra PREPA EE F lagi araa _ Pedi imta ims woke ever 1 ar pe i K Fh m pama yap SE pipa mapa i Tanha gamn T J J nml i a D imrarm Lari
60. miry pee Bue a P T D a Dts Fig 309 Luminaire arrangement Afterwards a final dialogue will appear automatically If you activate the checkbox the generated street will be calculated immediately DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 191 DIALux Version 4 4 DLL Hri lee Bee 5 Rj Cra ai ihk Monnina ind tae Simanta mikara nrmeo Gem Poet Porpey aem br imme man om m mi Em i mem l ep e aal e ibh a ieo m imar remmin Tb i a 2 10 ee oe Epa Mapi Cees F Fig 310 Final dialogue Click on the Finish button and your street project will be displayed You can do further work on this later Street Planning without Wizard By default a street only consists of one roadway with a valuation field at the beginning of a street planning SDIALux 4 1 Street 1 Floor plan B File Edit View CAD Paste Luminaire Selection Output Window D aHa io s amp 3 BeLowe s is SEGEEO GE bss Projektmanager L Street 1 Floor plan General Maintenance plan method i rea PT ae Hame Street 1 Description 5 00 llluminance Conditions Al Wizard W i aa E H Project 1 a 5 Luminaires Used E a Street 1 H a Roadway 1 Fig 311 Insert a new standard street When you select the street in the Project manager you can adjust some general settings In the nspector you will find options for the name a detailed description the maintenance factor or the design factor
61. of an empty room they are positioned on the floor at a height Z 0 util tn eee Se Se a SA ES ok i TAERE E ES i i om E i als II a BY aja nn Ei ien Cab pipes iE J E benm aaa ba me smi Fig 285 Insert UGR objects into a room A second way to insert these objects is to use the Property Page You just enter the numerical values of the DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 178 DIALux Version 4 4 position the size and the rotation and click on nsert It is the same Property Page that you can use to modify an existing object Adjust Viewing Direction of UGR Observer and UGR Area To adjust the viewing direction you can use the corresponding Property Page A direction of 0 means that the observer looks lengthways the X axis A positive angle means a counter clockwise rotation An arrow shows the viewing direction E i BE oe ae i Se Ud siren 9 LIITE ie ba bsacy z 7 ri nf E nal alj a mpe D Er F al Brain a Bi i ma tmm i lm amm pE Direction of 99 means lengthvays the Y axis Viewing direction of UGR area be m h LEE ks biia _ Fig 286 Viewing direction of an UGR observer DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 179 DIALux Version 4 4 Exterior Lighting Exterior Scenes You can use DIALux for planning of exterior scenes with almost the same steps you normally use in indoor lighting After starting DIALux you will see a startup dialogue HOCAL
62. or you can find the information at http Awww povray org Fig 432 The rendered image The output of the rendering is a bmp tfile that you can print import into other software or use with an image processing program DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 266 DIALux Version 4 4 Manipulation of the POV file and editing in POV Ray Start of the adapted POV Ray Version POV Ray is freeware available at www povray org DIAL changed POV Ray to adapt it to the needs of calculation with real luminaires The POV files created by DIALux can only be modified by the POV Ray version installed by DIALux If the user tries to open these files with the regular POV Ray an error message will occur To start the DIAL POV Ray version open the PVENGINE EXE file in your DIALux directory e g C Program Files DIALux and by a double click Smoothing edges The Anti aliasing function can be set in DIALux and with more parameters in POV Ray To edit a POV file you have to start the POV Ray program first and then load the pov file created by DIALux The following pictures are showing the same scene without smoothing edges with the setting switched on in DIALux and with a higher level defined in POV Ray This is normally only necessary for small detailed textures in big distances Calculation time Fig 433 Smoothing edges After loading the POV file into the editor the user can enter additional values for different parameters directl
63. ph arende cael ead fe nmaa ia jd pai F Leme P memi aien mia e p iis Sae penp jae P ufar r os CEE em Fig 19 Working with Wizards Room Name Room Form Room Alignment DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 26 DIALux Version 4 4 Enter the name of the room select L shaped room and afterwards define the orientation Quick Planning Wizard Room Dimensions Here you specify the room size Fig 20 Working with Wizards Room Dimensions Specify the Room s Dimension and the Room Height Which wall symbolizes each letter a to d is displayed on the drawing Tha chen of Hie eal Boor and obg riena het ditties ad Duick Pheig Wizard the wera an magre lane mhach ny paradai ther a a pc xd Soot the maitenance facto of deraa the deng lector Cancel Fig 21 Working with Wizards Reflection Work plane Maintenance Factor DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 27 DIALux Version 4 4 Specify the Reflectance Work plane and the Maintenance factor You can accept also the standard values of DIALux by clicking directly on Next wre AREL ET An Peas BGT SPE CALL GATT CORDO Dikin ERCO a ar a ck Planning Wired rae a FAFRHAT ipl ummar Saeco Selo a kemea Ap the aragerers lore ANA PANJER of Searels the iabe 1 Chal ire bo eae here lt 4 HOPES To JEAN Ley Biegne shani free LATAH E to bee ued Lined UEL SES See Lamp TEET H
64. py ee mri ibn remi i breme Utes Ea a Fig 305 Startup dialogue for street light wizard DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 189 Cm toes DIALux Version 4 4 Here you can specify the single elements for the street and their properties Confirm each of your steps by clicking on Next DIA s Upper lee Bead CRI Tren Me Jmm Ba eee ee seers raj Pa eee see ira i NARFE i pm Tiem Peia AE el Lehre kaia hmi f Diea jai oft a Cg an ll afm Fee Mirim Lew pi Cugini Fi afp Fig 306 Street profile Select those roadway elements which belong to the street profile of the project The coating can be chosen for dry and wet surrounding conditions This is necessary only for the calculation of the same uniformity UO wet Street name and maintenance factor are likewise inserted on this page In the following window you can fix the individual or combined valuation fields for the street In order to define photometric requirements for the street select an illumination class for every valuation field This is one of the essential innovations of the EN13201 on He ra S Tel E 3 E E va rg T I th E eE a a d Ss I pa a oS SS oe es Chis iy thee oats Taj ut amp manera ap metre gt meen sleet BED Gee ee om henay F Aap n a r f j z He f z i r a Se ee Fig 307 Valuation Fields and Illumination Classes By using the Selection button the illuminati
65. reflection factor siveccccvcsvecsescvendivderidavadervacdvccavedvaee eibixes A7 159 renden nnne mares ota ror rare ener OR Ten osname Ore Ene ARTA 221 POS UIT OUUTE cay saddittcesactematacmiant 181 noht mouse Butts es itu ah ted yee tne aa 34 POO AY sich ccd ceca E ceca E E eae eee cone 192 195 st eet f A ame tee ema ee tn eR Pn RTE En 96 semicylindrical IUMINANCE ccc cceeeeeeeccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 201 SCO WV AK aerae a Sn scouaa abodes ad eau uate aw ids 195 SI NOC ee e le Matenitt cn deca taccateele en taieitt end atncndeat ats aona se 137 Spont AZINE ae Atal ina hak ol cate dion sdnial Nata 137 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 295 DIALux Version 4 4 Sky DONE GION sobresen i E ERES 137 ODE E E AN 191 Solor ZIM Ula zsa2edet an A EA 137 solar MGI OW ei teccteSeidas cette dea e Matera E 137 SARAN gt Renee Oe oe nen ee ae eet ee ee eee 101 Street ClEMENL cccccecceccceccecececeaeececsuveceececeavececeaveneeeanens 197 Street Element 02 cccccccccceccecccuccucccecsuceceesceceeseeeceeteeeneetenenes 196 sree MIMICS aana a a ceded aa 209 SOE Geaa a a a eee eee eee 188 SUAN ean aaa a en 142 SUL ACSI VAI I aorar E 160 SV CICA aring E ht cisleeemnceneiucttesae 98 EEE cee ter eee Saree OR TR ne Care TT eT TET 219 E316 i 6s Cerne TES PERRET TN MEET TE ee nT RY RUN T ee A on ae Cte Oe 197 S Sars oy Tear nt nd ne nT a OA en Een ee PEE Ca 50 Task area BE 55 T7 denmen eines beset mete tenants aecm da
66. set your mouse function to Rotate View This way you can quickly reach each point in the room DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 145 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 222 Show calculation results in 3D view Now you can click at any point that Is of interest to you and the calculated illuminance is displayed in a small tool tp Save 3D View DIALux offers two different ways to export the current 3D rendering into a graphics file The easiest way to get a picture of the visualisation is to rotate or move the 3D view of a scene interior room exterior room or street into the desired position and then use the menu gt Export gt Save CAD view as JPG which opens a file selection dialogue ee ee ji aa pebowrs E ee paapua g pbe ube sn eee ones cet eee ste Faw 3 j a Fig 223 Save a 3D view as jpg file Here you can enter the directory and the filename The picture is stored as a jpog file with a 1024 x 768 pixel image To get a picture with a higher resolution proceed as follows o Make the planning as usual and adjust the perspective of the 3D CAD view o Change to the output and open the 3D rendering DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 146 DIALux Version 4 4 j eD Hair Ti Sumy 1 Fik frata iP a Lira aioe jarta lee 1 Pier plat N Lumanare coer dinabes bet E rire li pla E Funhfiure idir ind 2 Rigg demenis leyot pien Canit mal rea lh Sake o 3 i o Eho ps Fumture
67. settings of your output grid If you click on the Refresh View button DIALux determines the current calculation grid and displays the results in the output window alle ee SS ee ee PUE FTE a jetos j ja es lt chee pr bmi mer anor i i Pang eem i E m eee r a Ba Fig 364 Output of a light scene DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 222 DIALux Version 4 4 The documentation of the used luminaires is modified in DIALux too Luminaire Data Sheet The design is completely changed Besides the picture and the text two customisable diagrams are created When you use luminaires with several light outlets you can select which diagram is used for which outlet The luminaire can be classified according to numerous regulations DIN BZ UTE CIE NBN Projektmanager a Charts Classification Chart 1 Luminous emitt Loc Polar Chart 2 Luminous emitt Luminance Refresh View Fig 365 Settings of luminaire data sheet Luminance Diagram gt Projektmanager Classification Display the Following Luminaire Classification DIN i CIE C Be f NBN f UTE IY CIE Display flus code Refresh View The luminance diagram is a new development that allows the evaluation of the luminance with regard to different angles of radiation omni directional glare control C225 gn ar gn oo Fig 366 Luminance diagram for evaluation o
68. the number of pixels the larger is the final result In addition a large picture extends the calculation time e Smoothing edges Anti aliasing This feature improves the transitions at edges e g from walls This should be activated if textures with lines are used like tiles bricks or pavement This setting uses a lot of calculation power so it should not be used for preview pictures Not only textures are smoothed also the edges of the geometry will be straightened A higher degree of Anti aliasing can be selected in the POV Ray editor See advanced settings DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 259 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 424 Smoothing edges with POV Ray e Autobumpmaps If textures are used which have a surface texture e g wood or tiles you can produce a better 3D view with the activation Autobumpmaps They should be activated if the light dark information of the texture is identically with the high low structure E g water bricks wood The bump map texture will be calculated from the grey values of the image Within POV Ray also there are Independent bump maps that can be placed e Lighting preferences With Subdivide luminaires you can specify whether the influence of each individual luminaire or all luminaires should be calculated together The Subdivide luminaires setting generates a better result however the calculation time extends Without this option the light rays are starting only in the middle of the ligh
69. the raytracing files are stored in the my documents folder This was necessary to make sure that users with restricted privileges can load and save files Windows XP Windows 2000 C dokuments and settings user name my documents DIALux e Drive is the system drive standard C e subdirectory my documents is localized Standard my documents Windows Vista C User user name documents DIALux e drive is the systemdrive standard C e subdirectory user is localized DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 17 DIALux Version 4 4 e subdirectory documents is localized Program files support The DIALux directory is placed in the Program files folder This standard directory can be changed by the administrator The following examples are standard settings after a windows installation Windows 2000 XP Vista C Program files DIALux e drive is the systemdrive standard C e subdirectory program filesr is localized Common used program files DIALux Plugins The DIALux directory Is placed in the Program Tiles folder This standard directory can be changed by the administrator The following examples are standard settings after a windows installation Windows 2000 XP Vista C program files common files DIALux e drive is the systemdrive standard C e subdirectory program files is localized DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 18 DIALux Version 4 4 DIALux Ligh
70. the distance between the objects is fixed The first object is placed in the start point and every following one has the exact distance as defined If the length of the help line is not integer literal of the distance the complete length is not used and a rest of the line remains Fig 270 Copying along a help line with fixed distance In this way It is also possible to copy objects along spline help lines and circular help lines Help grids In addition to the help lines it is also possible to insert help grids into the scene To start this action click on the insert help grid icon Fig 271 Insert a help grid In the inspector start and end point as well as the grid angle and the grid distance can be adjusted In the graphical way first the start point have to be defined with the first click The second click defines the position of the end of the first axis of the grid The third click have to be made in a distance perpendicular to the second point to define the width of the grid area Initially the grid distance is set to 0 625m This value can be changed in the inspector or graphically by moving the dragger next to the start point DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 170 DIALux Version 4 4 is eae iniii A ane Exeter dey Aagba j TC 2 Chr E Fig 272 Defining a help grid The grid has snap points on each edge on the lines in half the grid length and in the middle of each grid element D Mm 1 irai
71. the luminaire positions can be defined in the CAD application as well for example in the case of a redevelopment or if the luminaires have to be placed in certain positions Export of the information via STF file to DIALux Import of the STF Tile into DIALux All the rooms defined in the CAD will appear in the DIALux project including additional information like the position of doors windows degree of reflection room intormation The user can now do the lighting design in DIALux The correct fittings can be placed additional calculation objects can be defined The calculation will be done and the documentation of the design can be made in DIALux Export of the revised STF file from DIALux to the CAD application Depending on the CAD software used a different level of information from the DIALux STF file is read in The information exported by DIALux is for example the luminaire name article number description electrical and light technical parameter pictures 3D model isoline diagram and so on Further information about the STF interface can be obtained trom dialog dial de or hotline dialux com Making videos in DIALux To create a video with DIALux you have to define the camera path First open the lighting design in the 3D window then use the command File gt Export gt Save 3D video Now a camera path appears in the CAD window DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 252 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 417
72. the right mouse button or click on the cube symbol 3D standard view You can use the double arrow for the rotation of the 3D view The button operations are the oupe zooms the DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 61 DIALux Version 4 4 hand moves and with the two feet you can roam the scene If you use a wheel mouse see page 33 these functions are also available al spines Prerr 4 i ag EEI u i mel Temi ea e came Se ee es Fig 79 Edit Rooms 3D view Edit Room Data If you select a room in the Project manager you can specify different properties via the Inspector In the General tab you can define the room s Name and a Description text pr General General Maintenance plan method Alignment Mame Room 1 Description a Fig 80 Edit room data General New in DIALux 4 is the maintenance plan method tab Here you can determine maintenance factors and set parameters for a maintenance plan based on EN 12464 1 and CIE 97 The maintenance parameters of the inserted luminaire arrangements can be optimized to a target maintenance factor It is possible for the user to use the maintenance factor as a consistent value for all luminaires in the room The lighting designer is required since the introduction of EN12464 to provide a maintenance plan for the lighting design Now with DIALux 4 this is integrated into the lighting design workflow and is automatically provided D
73. therefore be closed before the new project can be generated In the nspector you can define the Project Name and Descriptions of the project DIALux adds automatically the creation date Alternatively you can edit the date by deactivating the Automatic box _QDIALux 4 1 Room 1 3D iew E Fie Edit View CAD Paste Luminaire Selection Qutpi E ld ao i 3 Bisa RE Te PP LER SE FoR Qi Projektmanager lt Project Address Location Mame Projecti Description Dake I Automatic 06 09 2005 Ai Project 1 F Pt Luminaires Used I Room 1 Fig 70 Create a new project On the second tab you can arrange your Contact data These are replicated from the option settings if necessary you can modify these here In the third tab your Address is located and in the fourth tab are the Details of the project These details will appear also on the title page of the output Paet Coniac strict Destads Lazana Progact Cantazi Aken Tpatadi Lazana Popei Camtast debe Cheats Liitin Dotat uber Pub Comper Pub Laghi ond Deg M Sirto ox Contact Me Scho i Patav I sn Faa ooo pe EIEE hian LIE 1794 Samh Toan i Ech mf Fig 71 Insert project details Since DIALux 4 the additional tab Location is included This tab provides for the determination of the position of the sun with the daylight calculation see chapter Daylight calculation in DIALux You can insert here the location provided that th
74. toolbar DWG DXF Export You can export the result of your planning in dwg or dxt format speichern unter Speichem DXF JE it E m HH OTALux Dxf Export dxf 048 Philips dec DE DIALUx Dxf Exportklitten dxf HH Sporthalle dxf H facility berechnet dxf HUG DXF PH facility dxf iH Wismar dxf HHKLITTEN DXF H og DXF Dateiname DIAL CAD Export dd Dateityp DXF Files dd e Df Abbrechen DWG files dwa Fig 381 Save as dialog with DWG or DXF selection DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 231 DIALux Version 4 4 DWG and DXF Export DWG and DXF Export Isolines Name of file to be saved DiALux CAD Export dwg Object selection O Export only current scene Export all scenes in the project Export luminaires v Export furmiture Export geometry of the scene Generate legend Export the Isolines of the working plane Fig 382 DWG DXF Export dialogue DWG DXF Export DWG and DXF Export 3 Value Enter the value 0 in an input box to deactivate the respective isoline Layer properties Luminaires Active Fumiture H Active DLXFURN a Scene H Active JDLXSCENE lsolines Active Objects in deactivated layers can be switched to visible again in your CAD program at any time Fig 384 DWG DXF Export dialogue Layer DIAL GmbH LUdenscheid page 232 DIALux Version 4 4 DWG and DXF Export DWG and DXF Export Isolines Layer Options Expo
75. tote EAE E 195 BOON setts dia eres testers diate ie tcateraieceda ate haces a aa taantacetan cine le 210 DHONE Ses phases est car et hate salen Ca hin ies Shinde tN ates 125 COPINE eS teat tetas seine A eect eens 93 calculating ONO sranane EEEN 159 CACAO E E een ae EA 44 EEEO e AEE EE E S ET 207 214 222 Calculation Te US esi ne 160 calculation surface surrounding aled aai e e EN a E TAa 176 Calculation surface WOO A a A E 176 5 A I 2 a E E 39 GOTO CM CTU E A 34 COMOGUA as 117 COOK aee TOWN e E loca S OE 55 c ordinate Grigia A O el te 156 Aayo e r a eben eee 121 daon calcula NON as A 58 139 DHIT ILOS cs na n a a 121 daylight ObStruUCtiIOn 4 25 cdsekecte Setbectatacelulestcahicaead hameceasacdelee 137 DElETE COONCIN ALCS eenen AE 50 DIAL Ub Light Control cccchacsaenccsts ds iaetsaancesetsnreuemsbasnisesaances 126 ERILINE ENEN E ee eae nena nn mo ce 117 DV DHF 52 VC Darmon heehee eat ina tect eee eal ta inate ca tele 256 DWG and DXF DNG OD IDAF MD OM eean ia E 228 DAT areas eas eee Nee Sone PE TONS ORT AOR esa EEC OPN RE ROT RCS 228 BGIT CG alGUlatiOn S r dee aosa 48 POLE GPOUM GE LOIICI A saonenn A 48 EAIC ROON OEOME Y ene Nene train re ener ene entero wee 48 AEEA S eee enter ee te Re AE RT ek E E STE 101 Eulumdat t ahicata tea cacetueccente ce cancle lature tea aneccsanaaead saaueentctaees 38 39 export GUPCA DNC S a E viata saute 227 furniture SAV TU ITE a A eae aaa 157 furniture CC Ace ee ea deccctesaaadeck gaiana
76. view 231 380 3D view with DXF background cessssiceesesnnnn 231 381 Save as dialog with DWG or DXF selection 231 382 DWG DXF Export dialogue DWG DXF Export 232 383 DWG DXF Export dialogue Isolines 232 384 DWG DXF Export dialogue Layer 0 232 385 DWG DXF Export dialogue Options 233 386 Insertion of an energy evaluation project into a DIALux project via menu Paste and via the context menu of the DIALux project 235 387 Energy evaluation project in project tree 236 388 Transfer of all DIALux rooms into the energy evaluation PFOJ Ct cece ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 236 389 Transfer of one single DIALux room into the energy evaluation ProjeCissrssnop theiahiiatatattsa 236 390 Multi consideration of one energy evaluation room during the evaluation of the complete energy p rnormance Proj unaa et eee 237 391 Multiple energy evaluation rooms and there utilisation ZONOS cries a T A 237 392 An energy evaluation room with a selection of utilisation zones to which it can be moved 238 393 Energy evaluation room in project tree with its ASSESSMENT ZONES 2 cccccecceeeteccsesesescessevenees 238 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 291 DIALux Version 4 4 Fi g Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig
77. were committed to implement this directive into national right In medium terms the energy performance for buildings directive causes increased efforts for light planners Besides the well known lighting data characteristics they will also have to pay attention to new energy performance characteristics Fortunately a common light planning already contains a great deal of the needed information for an energy evaluation These information can be analysed and recycled for the energy evaluation So if the energy evaluation is integrated into the light planning process as efficient as possible the additional expenses for this evaluation can be reduced significantly That s why DIALux 4 4 offers the possibility to include an energy evaluation according to EN 15193 or DIN 18599 A DIALux user can include an energy evaluation project into a DIALux project with only two mouse clicks In Spain there is the C digo T cnico de la Edification defined to check and reduce the amount of energy used for lighting DIALux can calculate the needed figure Valores limite de eficiencia energ tica de la in stalaci n VEEI limite Mayor changes in existing functionality In the rulers of the 2D views it is possible to insert help areas to align objects along those axes A simple double click in the ruler is enough to define the help area Alternately the help area can be dragged from the ruler to the position needed in the CAD DIAL GmbH
78. 0 Effect of arrangement type and dimensioning type on the luminaire field dimensions The arrangement type is also taken into account when the luminaire fields are edited via CAD DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 97 DIALux Version 4 4 ses eta iP 77 lll E T F 7 g i T l EEEE E E E DEAN 1 i SUE E eS a DLON i KUH Fig 141 Luminaire field insert frames depending on the arrangement type In the CAD ground plan view three possible edit or insert frames for the luminaire field are shown When the Symmetrical Within arrangement type is selected the outer blue broken line appears The frame in the middle appears when Outer Edge to Outer Edge and the innermost red frame correspondingly appears with the Luminaire Centre to Luminaire Centre selection The dimensioning of the luminaires and of the start and end point of the field correspondingly changes You can change the extent of the luminaire field via the mouse To do this right click on the field in the tree or in the CAD By pulling on a line or on a corner coordinate you can change the extent just like you can do with the furniture Please note that the amount and of course the size of the luminaires remain the same Projektmanager y Luminaire Mounting height Rotations Luminaire DIAL 365 900 Leuchte E Project 1 H Luminaires Used Fig 142 Luminaires used in the arrangement The luminaires in an arrangement can a
79. 1 Explorer context menu whilst DIALux 4 2 is running When DIALux is running in the background you can search any desired directories for luminaire data and import them to the current DIALux project or you can insert them into your own database right click on the file DIALux supports the following formats Eulumdat Idt e CIBSE TM14 e IES all variations e LTLI Lamp Plugins After selecting a luminaire in a luminaire Plugin some of them offer the possibility to start an installed lamp Plugin to tind a lamp that fits into the luminaire The lamp Plugin provides all the technical and marketing data needed including photometric files and maintenance factors If a luminaire Plugin is not yet prepared to start a lamp Plugin the lamp selection can be started within DIALux instead In the Property Page Technical data of the luminaire there is a button with three dots besides the lamp type drop down list Clicking on this button you gets a selection of all installed lamp Plugins One has to be selected to find the correct equipment according to the requirements of the lighting layout and the fittings DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 39 DIALux Version 4 4 Fi General Description Technical Data Luminous emittance 1 Lamp T 36W w Ecc Luminous Flux 2350 im Power 36 lw Correction factor 1 000 Correction reason Project 1 hy Lumi
80. 103 Edit rooms Edit room element n os 76 104 Edit rooms DIALux room elements 06 76 105 DIALux room elements Vault cece ceeeeeeeee 76 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 285 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 106 DIALux room elements Dome and half dome 76 107 Edit rooms Insert room elements via Property Page E dao Maia ants E senieea aaa 77 108 Drag and Drop of furniture s neeeeeeeeeeeensirrnn 78 109 Create furniture Standard bodies c cc 78 110 Create furniture Modify the dimensions 79 111 Create furniture COpy s sssssiiiiiieeeeeeesssrrrrrrrrren 79 112 Create furniture OMDING waco ee 80 113 Create furniture Export furniture 0 0 0 80 114 Create furniture Saved furniture ceee 81 1t5 mport furniture TOS cuca 8 sina ce ves shout cae Guest 81 116 Creating an extrusion VOIUME 0 ccccceeecceeee ee eeees 82 117 SUDIFACTIONS TOMI a VOW accel teae eee aan 83 118 Resulting VOI esana eewhenetna ude ts 83 119 Selecting specific surfaces from a volume 84 120 Drag amp drop for window
81. 30 SD VIEW Tor the TENGEN G icerenst sgt pines natin aaets 265 ANG i eo a ime goal 18 6 21d 9 6 eee ne mn 266 432 The rendered IMage cccccceeeecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 266 A353 3 SMOOWING CAGES a icioletai ou seiaG oes aieas ace 267 434 POV Ray for VVINGOWS ceisir ah Rica a a 268 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 292 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig ASS ec CU oan es 18 en AE 269 436 Manipulated picture SIZC cece ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 269 437 Change picture SIZE ccc ccc eecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeenes 269 438 Camera look and location ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 271 439 Exterior scene visualiSation cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeees 271 440 Settings camera location 272 441 Starting an anmation in PovRay using key frames 273 442 Animation settings 00 c0ccccceceesetectseeseeeseesseseess 274 443 Camera Rotation and translation 000 275 444 Movement of the camera cceeeecceeeeseeeneeeeeeeees 277 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 293 DIALux Version 4 4 Index PI PEPE ET TE star eate demudcaon amincatensnateuenesse Gataeen caidas 146 SID ENON Galeana A 44 SaVe AS DI TUTE are E EO 44 algne eien A 137 alignment of luminaires sessios eiea EE E 94 En GVO aC ac Ol et een eats acssese eee ec eee 223 AE R eee ee ee Teen OD eRe Ee Se 156 CMG ATS IN Gein ste crate enaenceeiga obec nag A gnats 98 EE AE 24562 E Missense eel Sek
82. 50 m Fig 130 Mounting tab Additionally information is shown giving the maintained and initial illuminance due to these luminaires and due to the whole room Projektriiannges Tecra Duta Rostahors Light scenes Control groups General 1 Prot 1 Hos jim Lied My yD t Tahia OF x DEAL 10 PAST DF Ei ey OF Oa HAL DAtra oF Dx DIAL LSPA OF LDA IE lehe Ge hem ad Wiekplare a Herr B Ci Wa a wall j Ea i E was E wa Jj lores Lony Jeiki Lurrr W 12 AL Se oles Fig 131 Modifying the technical data of luminaires To modity the Technical Data of the luminaires these must have been inserted into the room In the Project manager the luminaires contained in the arrangement are listed beneath the respective arrangement type An individual luminaire arrangement tn this case If you DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 92 The CO level of luminaires with a rotation of 0 is directed lengthways in the positive X axis Gammad0 points vertically from the top to the bottom DIALux Version 4 4 select one of these luminaires you can modify its technical data If you select multiple luminaires in the CAD you can modity the values of all selected luminaires Aligning Luminaires In DIALux you can switch on Help rays for the luminaires In the menu View you can find the function Help rays for Luminaires REE ee ae ee i ET mm po a ia iw ee i eee fe fa pafeer Chea Aal l A et ace Bb
83. 5044 for example for checking old street luminaire arrangements For such circumstances DIALux allows street light planning according to DIN 5044 In a street s Property Page General you can select DIN 5044 from the Illuminance Conditions selection DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 215 DIALux Version 4 4 Project 1 E Luminaires Used el age Exterior Scene 1 ay Street 1 Fig 354 DIN 5044 for the road lighting calculation DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 216 DIALux Version 4 4 Global Output Settings User Data and Project Data In the menu Settings gt General Options gt Output you can define user and project data that are stored as default values These are used when you create a new project see also page 52 In the Property Page Output you can specify a bmp file as a logo The footer line is used for page 2 and the following pages Furthermore you can specify the names of five edit fields that are used later for information on the cover page x Standard Values Global CAD window Output Contact Isoline pt Output for working levels lzoline Values Font Size 10 0 pt M Draw Luminaires Value Chart Font Size 10 0 pt M Draw Furniture Scale of graphics i Maximum size Optimal standard scale Logo E Mmage1 bmp ne Footer Bureau Header T Display file path I Display file name Project details Names for edit fields 1 Ansprechpartnertin 7 Fima F oo 2 uft
84. 57 Creating helping areas in the ruler 165 258 In the left scetch the object is moved on its origin on the right it is moved on the bounding box In the second case the rotation Is adjusted 165 259 ICONS to INSERM Neinei tala 166 260 Icons to switch on and off the snap to help lines 166 26l inserung e ICUS ING codebase teat tae ae aa ee 166 2602 Display Nelp iNES soir deesaie raw cle loue titer sanehiawshacd 166 263 Insert a poly line stop the mode with a right click 167 264 Move the complete poly line by holding down the ALT 265 A closed spline help line In the start and end point are draggers to change the line 168 266 Move the complete poly line by holding down the ALT 267 Copy along a help ilne with the mouse 169 268 Mouse symbol to select a help line for copying 169 269 Copying in the standard setting with placing objects HCV OTK aio iia etait satan unas iaeirdoaes 169 270 Copying along a help line with fixed distance 170 271 Inserta help CUA Grete eee dM tient a ae cele 170 212 Denning Res A On 8 18 dea n nee ree ee 171 273 SMAD POISON ING NEI anaa 171 274 Copy along a line with the mouse ee 172 275 Copy along a line with the inspector 08 172 276 Context menu CAD Align and distribute 173 277 Menu Edit Align and distribute eee 173 278 Align and distribute centred In space 173 279 Inser
85. 6 Obstruction in CAD VIQW cccccccceeeccecccceee ee eeeeees 141 217 Sun and shadow visualisation ccccccceeeeeeeeeees 142 218 Calculation ClalOGue sae eee 143 219 Evaluating a staircase from the upper storey 144 220 Toolbar for switching between modes 2 144 221 Change perspective and focal distance of the camera PEE E M ne Rene ee eT ea E ee 145 222 Show calculation results in 3D VIOW c eee 146 223 Save a 3D view as jpg file 0 0 ccceeeeeees 146 224 Open the 3D rendering ccccceeeccccceeeeeeeeeeees 147 225 Copy the 3D rendering into another software 147 226 False colour IITUMINANCES 0c eee cc cece eee eeeeeeeees 148 227 False colour LUMINANCE aR 148 228 VIEWS NOC Wa ncGe ieee ea eae eee 149 229 Working IN various VICWS cccccceeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeee cess 149 230 Multiple view arrangement 149 231 Closing CAD WWITOOWS tegen tenis ori tela dent nia leaned eaten 150 232 Save camera view via context MENU s 150 233 Save camera VIEW Vid MENU ccccccsseeeceeeeeeeeeees 151 234 Redo camera view Redo positiOns ccee 151 235 Changing into the wireframe mode 152 236 Graphically modifying the object height 153 237 Dragging an object by its corners and automatic OO ee en eee nS ere Es 154 238 Pick grid settings Display Grid eee 155 239 Pick grid settings Snap Grid ceeeeecee eee 155 240 Pick
86. 95 Display of assessment zones of an energy evaluation room in 3D VIEW Assessment zones are both the bottom and the most important level of the energy evalution The actual evaluation is done on this level all needed parameters are determined here Energy demands are explicitely calculated only for assessment zones all other results for energy evaluation rooms utilisation zones or the complete energy performance project arise from Summing up results of involved assessment zones Of course you can also use The Guide to navigate through the complete energy evaluation process DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 239 DIALux Version 4 4 The Guide a x 2 Innenraumbeleuchtung AuBenbeleuchtung Strabenbeleuchtung Lichtszenen Notbeleuchtung Tageslicht Energiebewertung Geografische Informationen fF Standort bearbeiten Nordausrichtung festlegen i Fenster und Oberlichter einf gen Bereiten Sie Fenster und Oberlichter f r die Energiebewertung vor indem Sie deren Eigenschaften detailliert festegen Markieren Sie dazu ein oder mehrere Fenster bzw Oberlichter im Projektbaum und editieren Sie deren Eigenschaften im Inspektor Energiebewertung Energiebewertung einf gen amp Energiebewertungsnorm auswahlen p Einen Energiebewertungsraum pro Raum im DIALux Projekt erzeugen Neuen Energiebewertungsraum ohne Verkn pfung zu einem DIALux Raum erzeugen o Bewertungsbereiche darstellen Th Nutzungsprofil
87. ALux Version 4 4 LS DIALux 4 1 Room 1 Floor plan L File Edit wiew COD Paste Luminaire Selection Output W DEHRA H ETA als ame eB fy ef H 2 Projektmanager Luminous emittance 1 Luminous emittance 2 Lale Maintenance interval JE very 3 0 years Luminaire type Indirect luminaire ae arg 258 snae E Replacement interval lamps in years 20 Lamp type Tri phosphorus fluoresce I Individual replacement of defective lamps Edit individual factors manually MF ASh YF LMF J LLMF LSF faa 0 86 ass 0 88 fio Mote New values directly from manutacturer UMM aires Total Planing value 1530 x 1723 Ie Hew 2608 x 2049 x Fig 91 Insert another arrangement in the same room Now an optimum number of luminaires can be determined here for the project as a whole The maintenance factor also can be seen in the CAD view Because luminaires in certain room zones can be subjected to different conditions for example higher pollution or different operating hours the maintenance factors of the individual luminaires can be shown in the CAD view Local differences in maintenance factor consequently can be easily understood You can display the maintenance plan factors either in the menu gt view or in the menu bar in the CAD window asl Ph ES Se eae wm E j i Jah mme TEPPET E tefa jaan p on COTS r be f i gis h oe T ea ire j EEr m E aa i ttm E alaa mjra i Sn Sy a a
88. CENE ainina tense E TA 138 Daylight CAlCUL ATOM intarita 139 OD TUC O EA 141 Sun and shadow visualisation cccecccceeeeeeeeees 142 Settings in the calculation dialogue c00 142 VVOPKING i TAGS De WICW tis nes clunniney ccsaluietiinieiedaicencn inn des 144 Setup the 3D VICW neusen 144 Check Calculation Values in the 3D View 145 SAVE SO VICW ereiaro eSEE EEE S 146 Presentation of false colour rendering 0068 148 Working in Various VICWWS cotta nc suse ts rite reid tured vachig 149 Save 3D CAD VIEWS cccccecccccseceeseeeeeneeeeaeeeeeneeees 150 Wirerame Modelesrratane eii tea ales 152 Editinginserted ODI OCS mrnerncare en or Eie 153 Mound Obe E eese teen aetiaias 153 Using any surface as a working surface 06 05 154 Moving and Rotating Objects without Pick Grid 154 E EERO O E E EE E EE EET 156 ROA UAE OBEC Sne 156 Scaling OD GGUS renina a a 157 Combining and Saving Objects cccccceeeeceeeees 157 Moving the Coordinate Origin of an Object 158 Resetting the rotation of the Origin eae 159 Editing Objecte SUTTACES seen teAnc iets act arcades EE 159 AUGAIVG GINGINT GIGS 1 Sects tsi iol a yt tual Voia natin 162 Measurement of distances cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 162 Working with the snap grid isc dicicbicntvcrnercenuan 163 Automatic help lines eeeereerrresrrrerrrreerrees 163 Helping areas defined in the ruler ccce 164 W
89. DIALUuX Version 4 4 The Software Standard for Calculating Lighting Layouts User Manual DIALux Version 4 4 2007 DIAL GmbH Gustav Adolf StraBe 4 58507 L denscheid dialog dial de www dial de 13th Edition 2007 The text and images were prepared with great care DIAL the authors and the translators are however not subject to legal obligation or liability for any erroneous information and its consequences This publication is protected by copyright law All rights are reserved Most of the soft ware and hardware designations used in this manual are registered trademarks and therefore subject to the applicable laws The DIAL GmbH can not be held responsible for any damage to people or property which might occur in connection with the use of the DIALux software The program and documentation was created with great care however errors cannot be ruled out POV Ray POV Ray is short for the Persistence of Vision Raytracer a tool for producing high quality computer graphics POV Ray is copyrighted freeware that is to say we the authors retain all rights and copyright over the program but that we permit you to use it for no charge subject to the conditions stated in our license You can read the license by viewing the POV Ray for Windows About box by using the Help menu or Alt B and selecting the appropriate button CONTACT INFORMATION for POV Ray License inquiries can be made via email please check th
90. DIALux Light Wizard Calculation cceeeee 22 12 DIALux Light Wizard Calculated Result 00 22 13 DIALux Light Wizard Result Output 23 14 DIALux Light Wizard Output eee 23 15 DIALux Light Wizard End ctenieeiecer nace abner near 24 16 DIALux Startup DigloGue cccis 4 eiosianseieeiienaciess 25 IaM DIAL WIZA s E 25 18 Working with Wizards Start cece eeeeeeeeees 26 19 Working with Wizards Room Name Room Form ROOMVANQMIMGNG steric dcoureiaccerstesacrureadavelias 26 20 Working with Wizards Room Dimensions 27 21 Working with Wizards Reflection Work plane Maintenance Fact0r cccccccccccsecccsseeeeeseneees 27 22 Working with Wizards Luminaire Manufacturer SN O etccaee hate ates hag eps toe hea ereiceminnet 28 23 Working with Wizards Plugin User Database 28 24 Working with Wizards Luminaire Selection 29 25 Working with Wizards Mounting height 29 26 Working with Wizards Calculate the number of UMIRA Seear S 29 27 Working with Wizards Alignment of the luminaires 30 28 Working with Wizards Calculate result 0 30 29 Working with Wizards Visually represented result 31 30 Working with Wizards Single Sheet Output 31 31 DIALox user I Ll aCe sa tacatert Sis aks et etait ate catenin 32 52 3D VIEW OT a OOM icteric ves e A seein 33 33 Ground plan view of FOOM s
91. DIALux Version 4 4 Lal es eel Peep al a Pew ge ian aed ae ea ad eve Pt ede Lia F Fo eu gt mers FO AO TS ace 7d a a Lome cia ae ane r fo fh a E sl bo mirai cee l jaj iep i j j Pi f a oe TP L mma Fig 11 DIALux Light Wizard Calculation Afterwards DIALux Light displays the results in a figure of isolux lines and a table for the work plane T biara ai jahe BEP FA OF CAPE HFEA AARNA FU RN FR FAN nl n Eme ee HE Le T kapr ee Ball a oe tanto Fined ha a ia Hoon cad ma ee i cies Get p he Epa F A Fe A oo eee ree ta tre oe ae LS a ee A e A e o s Ei LE my MS bs HF Til x pi ahs Hoe re IW mi inl ho ae ah r me m ismim ai pa re Ig a mn WT aoe A i _ La SATT Hh ps mo w b a w D w Ur TL ee ee ee ee i i ni owes Ee yw 6 M j H e He aeh 1 0 ES a hammam Biar J oes fia Ems ff Emm eee Eee eee idl mi ii in in Pp ery Bilesin Fig 12 DIALux Light Wizard Calculated Result In the Resu t Outout window you have several choices you can print the results or save them in electronic format as a pdf file So click the appropriate button By using the check boxes next to the printout symbols you can affect which outputs are actually printed out By default all outputs are activated If you would like to provide for example only a short overview activate only the summary If you would like to present the results to your custom
92. DIALux user interface By default DIALux always starts with the language of the computer operating system If a different language is selected DIALux will need to be closed and restarted to activate the language change Under the Global tab you can specify additionally the dimensional units metric or imperial and the photometric units European or American x Standard Values Global CAD Window Output Contact Project Directory C Program Files DlA4Lus Projects i Language English United Kingdom wi W Show welcome dialog at program start Start mew project default wth f nothing C Room Exterior Scene Standard street Which system should be used for dimensions lengths areas etc Dimensions Metric SI m crn etc Which system should be used for photometric dimensions illuminance light density ete Lighting engineering European SI le cdv etc Hote Changes are not seen in open windows in the Inspector Close and re open a window or open a new window to see the changes Cancel Fig 63 General Options Global DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 53 DIALux Version 4 4 If the CAD Window tab is selected you can select the Background Colours for your project and for the printout Direct3D as an alternative to OpenGL DIALux uses the most modern techniques for visualisation of the lighting design Before OpenGL or the MESA mode was used Because sever
93. Fe i deg PY se Miaa Fig 155 Context menu of the unrestricted luminaire arrangement You can modify these further by changing the name position rotate or modify the origin DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 104 DIALux Version 4 4 4 os i l d ki pilin Bi pE p g eii ieee ee ee saa onura i uja foxes lt Ve A Bala 4 Pes coea 44 Mire iby coos e ples iim Tm te jhar Se a im ake i is E H iu bE ibi 1 i i el ae eee i i i Fi Fin FE lijm a mi ope gE ey a hah is iin a iF Fig 156 Modify the new luminaire arrangement You have the ability to copy and paste the whole luminaire arrangement in the context menu If you want to take out individual luminaires of the new luminaire group first of all you have to split the unrestricted luminaire arrangement Then you can select the luminaire which should be removed from luminaire group and open the context menu Now you can access the function Remove from luminaire group E E ee eee be ee i eee eee L I ELE E pa pas De a bess chee tal Nema imm Wiser pes Fret dm rii jrih E Ti GEH Fig 157 Remove from luminaire group Aligning luminaire arrangements You can align to CO GO C90 GO or Imax among individual luminaires also complete luminaire arrangements To do this select the inserted luminaire arrangement luminaire field line or circle arrangement unrestricted luminaire arrangement and proceed with
94. Fields in Exterior Scenes 00 185 Oa UNV GN otra haan ithe st ceed lara Salat ara ean venetian 188 Standard WEE suche teers a ance Ae meg eem utter 188 Quick Street Planning Wizard 189 Street Planning without Wizard cccceeecceeees 192 Illumination Conditions Wizard l 193 Illumination Class Wizard assire dete trccnes tester auietuteee 202 Sreet MOMMA TON coseieahics verses Seth ated attic ue ieee 207 Luminance Calculation according to DIN 5044 215 Global Output SettingS ss nessiiueesiiresrireesrrreeerrnn 217 User Data and Project Data ccccceeccccee teens 217 GO Wale RUINS nenn seta nee te Monee is 218 UUs isse a tect Puen sale dk bated iets 219 Viewing Calculation Results cccccceeeeeceee ees 219 EVV RESUME OUPO sccc a iota ace iee alee hase ae oes 220 CUTOUT SO UNGS 2 apse ancacanattunet saree deed iaatancaasedeaasee s 221 New Outro Ul iB A WU este tsaaited notte r 222 Luminaire Data Shed eee ane een eee er 223 Luminance Did ON aM wecccncyactes sicletalatseiernanncucceiotes 223 Tabular Presentation of Photometric Data of I GMI ENE SS A E E EEEE 224 Tabular Presentation of Exterior Scenes 224 Creating User Defined Standard Output 224 Save O tput as PDF FIE oere aaa encce 226 Export Output Graphics tables text and graphic 226 DWG and DXF Import and Export cccceeeecee eee 228 DWG APSO ONG eh acate setae btaoecuis Seven dente dealal ananestse
95. I SoS ey a 4 l Leal bef m Ses bh J irm 1 r di PPA ser ee JE Seca Hh eo lee I d Bng e i i oe aoe E lanri apg er oe E g e 1 s ppm prea m an Bansku 2A Ppl 1 fee mo joo Mba Pa u rE n a I es ee a y BE ke ed l E E o l a a E i da a an i in i i F ETI IH reais 4 ii i uE es AE F fom d be UF i BE riri LEH Diri a kd Fig 372 Export the output graphic to a file or copy it into the clipboard You can export the graphical output DIALux created to almost all other Windows software like Word or image processing software To do this open the according output in the output tree and adjust the settings e g steps colours font size Now click and hold the left mouse button in the output window and drag the output image to the other program The image is copied to this program as a wmf image ree a aids ja i a J at win iae Sa a er OE T nm hn mE Wai Ei EO ik os i bH Paka Bs Fig 373 Export of output graphics to other programmes Of course you can also copy text and tables to other programs with Copy and Paste DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 227 DIALux Version 4 4 DWG and DXF Import and Export With DIALux you may import DWG and DXF drawings and use them for your work After you finished your planning you can export the room geometry the room elements the luminaires and the furniture into your CAD drawing DWG DXF Import o Create an
96. IAL GmbH L denscheid page 62 Maintenance plan method for determination of the maintenance factor DIALux Version 4 4 Ite ee ania ada aaa a _ General Maintenance plan method Room Surfaces Alignment f All inclusive Maintenance factor Ja 80 Reference Please select an application amp C Extended EN 12464 Ambient conditions Normal Maintenance Annually X Fig 81 Edit room data Maintenance plan method An easy method for determining maintenance factor In DIALux the user is able to select whether he wants to have a global all inclusive maintenance factor for the whole room or whether he wants to determine the respective maintenance factor for every luminaire luminaire arrangement The easiest way which is the method used in early DIALux versions is to use the classical method After a room or exterior scene was added to a project the user can make the maintenance choice in the Property Page General Maintenance plan method Room Surfaces Alignment f All inclusive Maintenance factor fo ol Reference Please select an application e C Extended EN 12464 Very clean room low yearly usage Clean room 3 year maintenance cycle Ambient conditions Exterior installation 3 year maintenance cycle Interior or exterior installation high pollution Maintenance Annually Z Fig 82 Edit room data Selection of a reference value for the maintenance factor
97. IALux should use When creating new rooms these values are used as presets Of course you can change the current planning values or standard presets at any time That means if you want to accomplish calculations for another country you do not have to change each entry individually DIALux has the relevant parameters for all the usual standards and regulations of individual countries Hint These changes do not change the DIALux language setting As an alternative you can change the values individually DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 52 DIALux Version 4 4 DIALux 3 1 i x Standard Values Global CAD window Output Contact Standards United Kindom Room Dimensions Reflection factors Workplane Length 3 600 m Ceiling Height a r0 m width 600 m halls Wall zone 0 500 m Height 2 800 rm Floor Display design factor 128 Display maintenance factor 0 80 Initial specifications for luminaire fields Em 900 e Em Lisi 50 fe Em outside fio Ik Em outside US i fc Luminaire Classification according to DIN C pe f UTE C COE NBN UGR Spacing to H eight Ratio 025 C 7 00 luminance quotient according to LG 3 Addendum 2001 IY Output Standard UGA Values Fig 62 General Options Standard Values If the Global tab is selected you can define the directory the folder in which you will save the projects By using the entry Language you will change the language of the
98. Inserting a camera path in the 3D view At the beginning the end and at all inserted points of the path the camera position in X and Y direction can be defined by left click and moving the mouse The Z position can be changed by left click and holding down the control CTRL key Fig 418 Inserting additional camera positions along the path DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 253 DIALux Version 4 4 Near to the end points and in the middle between two points there are green symbols By clicking on these symbols a new point is inserted into the camera path If the red symbol is clicked the associated point Is deleted Fig 419 Deleting camera positions At all the points there are thin green lines drawn These lines are defining the viewing direction of the camera The small ball at the end of these lines can be moved with the mouse To move into the Z direction hold down the control key DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 254 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 420 Defining the camera viewing direction The camera is moving along the path trom point one to point two It is turned during the movement according to the viewing directions in point one and two If you want to have more rotations on the way trom point one to point two you have to insert more points directly on the path only changing the viewing direction and not the position of the path The camera is not following strictly the path The path is co
99. L denscheid page 9 DIALux Version 4 4 Working with the mouse the user will recognize that in several positions the software will make Suggestion to place or move an object Moving an object along a wall an automatic snap to the middle of the wall will appear when the object is close to it The wall itself also has a gravity for objects and luminares To align objects it is now possible to place lines or grids in the 2D views It is also possible to copy any object luminare furniture or a combination of them along these lines Helplines are also generated automatically by DIALux These automatic help lines will appear when you move one object along an axis of another object They will disappear when the action of movement is finished Selected objects can no longer only be moved in their insertion point Now you can also move it in any corner of the bounding box That makes it very easy to place one object next to another Moving an object at its bounding box will also automatically rotate it if the object where it Is moved to e g a wall has a different rotation Selecting an object in the 3D view and moving it around you can now select the area you work on by hitting the space bar For example you move a cube towards a wall until the mouse icon with the object is in front of the wall now hitting the space bar will make the wall the area you move the object on Instead of X and Y axis you are now working on X and Z This wo
100. L GmbH L denscheid page 3 DIALux Version 4 4 Contents OIA SIS oe sae heer pare E E T 4 New functions in DIALUX Version 44 9 New features and increments i 9 Mayor changes in existing Tunctionality 9 Smaller changes in the existing functionality 10 stallat Oses e T 12 Installation after Internet Download c 12 mstalaton Tron C Dirion 13 Gae MeD Ussia AN 14 Onine Upadle ic a aioe eer ere eam 14 Manage Newsletter subscription cece cee eeeee eee 14 Wishes and Feedback Send problem report 14 stall Luminaire Dal atte cote uncer ahion etuicind ianceke sete 15 PO OUI PMMA ernen E 15 About Online GC atalOQUES csi tclasicmetin elena enateceieh 15 Lamp PIGS seminair ehe sk cu amcce ade sted 15 BEV ee EER OA ols arene ete eee etme mr nr mee Rene er reer 17 Background information gecesi edhe greens 17 Furniture textures my database cccceeeeeceee ees 17 WIndows Vi el topcase state tear ieste arte ea dacenten Galenoe 17 Projects and raytracing THES secvietecurcssessatires sevecnoccaus 17 MINIONS Sel sexta ct E cae etic tate a ee E 17 Programi TIES SUPPO I gecesi desea cneacaceled Soeteaey Apcacesaiees 18 Windows 2000 XP Vista cccceccececceceecececeeceeeceeess 18 Common used program files DIALux Pluglns 18 Windows 2000 XP Vista ccccccccececceceecececsuceeseceeeess 18 DIALO a Ee Manman ren meaty a ane ater 19 Working with VVI
101. OSIN OMe Actetewiiesticssh ppaleuriedeteu hake 99 145 S Cala luminare MING sea aa 100 146 Edita luminaire NING mreana 100 147 Aligning individual luminaires within an arrangement ME E AEAEE AAEE EAE T 101 148 Selection filter for CAD selection 101 149 Luminaire circle start and end angle e 102 150 Modify luminaire data Corrections 00cc0 102 151 Modify luminaire data Mounting height 103 152 Selection of rotatable luminaire parts 04 103 153 Turn the rotatable luminaire part by mouse pointer Ree Sore ra E AAE E AAR DE eee See Oe 104 154 Align the rotatable luminaire part ee 104 155 Context menu of the unrestricted luminaire arrangements seisseen ian aee 104 156 Modify the new luminaire arrangement 105 157 Remove from luminaire group cccccccceeeeeeeeeees 105 158 Aligning luminaire arrangements Context menu 106 159 Set illumination point Aligned luminaire Tield 106 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 286 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 160 spectral light calculation wceinessnwcesasiccwasasepaiauens 107 161 non spectral light calculation eee eee eee 108 162 Light colours
102. Panj 7s 40868 e nent oemi oe niet 7 E Be ka lies U Eak ej Taa nina Clie it i re brr prerii eee es el F ee S i M Pe Fe a IPEN ba me Eaererey himimss n a im 10 E EE or i maaa F an jua He Re m Pirre 2 T ee Pret Sed P ni P al MAIE DRAA ia Le Fig 368 Property page output exterior scene Creating User Defined Standard Output The user can generate and save trequently used combinations of output types in DIALux To do this a folder that contains output must be selected in the Output tree DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 224 DIALux Version 4 4 repel nanager that pak Conligqur alien Horg Stardacdaucgate L are Seber tecl Duta j Poet ich Project Dever ae Table of oiana J hater fb be CL ee aj OLA I oH ee i 6 Larenere Date Seat 7 g 05 Sheth i J BAL Pe RAD SS TH ELF SL HJ HA Se _ 9 Pee i i Lipa Prahara daal umrare pri ii Maintenance pian Fic Hyi ie 6 Lurar hre a gt Lunn oi i Pupils Layee pe J Pih aerd bet Room eerreants lra pan Roim sarii ion t THF SuPer OEE ht mr na J me Fig 369 Creating standard outputs Start on the highest hierarchy level i e the project Select the project in the output tree in this case project 1 If you wish to use a preset standard select it from the Name listbox To generate a standard check the output types which should be included in your standard Please keep in mind that th
103. Ray creates every 360 25 14 4 degree a picture The camera should be turned around its own centre Therefore it is necessary to translate it into the origin before rotating otherwise the camera will be rotated around the origin on a circular path To achieve this you have to enter lt translate camlocation gt then lt rotate lt 0 clock 360 0 gt gt then again lt translate camlocation gt desired rotation zy camera a 0 0 translation path Mea o turn without translation Fig 443 Camera Rotation and translation Each picture will be calculated one after another after clicking on the Run icon Each picture will be saved into the work directory with consecutive numbering With any animation tool pictures can be combined to a movie avi mpeg The freeware tool VirtualDub can create such movies in a short time in high quality http Awww virtualdub org index Translation animation You can detine a camera path using clock To do so the Ini file and the POV file have to be changed Instead of the camera rotation you can change the camera location using the clock parameter In the following example we change the POV Tile of the first example The Ini is already changed The POV file will be changed by adding the clock variable to the X position of the camera location declare GAMMA 1 4 declare AMBIENTLIGHT 0 0
104. Ree Se none Rene So Pe ae 145 maintenance TACO istic nics hace ithe a ec ee ele eee 190 mMamtenanc OAC OLS ua Maley Clore bad le 62 maintenance plan Methodi seina 62 maintenance valUe steer ae ns te re hea oa Masti eae dana 64 92 Matende te mene tees meer ner nr nee ent nn een eee mee 159 Mediassa n N NEN 199 MONO OUD tsaa soak rae E E 219 mMmoun ng height resanni E R 91 AET e 01 a tee ne E E E E E E ETTA 92 Notinstaled PIGON Sei a tae 38 ONONE aee a E ee 198 OD TUON eneen EEA 141 omni directional glare CON Olax 22 exist ie os 223 OO UMS 2 OM EE E S E enlokth feeceantads 210 60 Edge amen ee este ene Erna Tee een A 98 output combinations of output types vedsccdaetdesseeadsonigemesdameantion 224 multiple output simultaneously 0 0 cece cece eeeeeeeeeeees 44 SCICCIN aa acta E E EN 44 OUUTE CUON ese aE 44 parkiINO INE ma tet lene ier reenter tec tae eee ven 195 199 Fr Ole AEE AE A EE EE T IE EE E E EE 226 photometric FEQUIFEMENTHS cccccesseeeeececeeeeeeeee ees 190 201 916 Re le eee terse a a es reese nC br vee nee eee Ce 154 FOS eer aateh ck late edna ected rien Aneta Ae nee eam eeentads 210 SOS NCC xi hea inant dae i A Mila tees Fal ott 191 PNACOUTDU E asie earns ter ernment ert Wenn iene rere etn GE nee Meee tr 219 DINE I CV GW mss orn N REAA ONEA 220 FO CU O O o E E 37 92 Project Ir a 32 PRO CCE TO ga E A 36 PODENI C a a a aa 46 Quick Street Planning WIZAIC ccccceccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 189
105. ZANOS 6 ciccn nitrate tcl cteeceiubitiaidt andy Moana 25 The DIALux User Interface cccccccceesesseueesesseneesenees 32 Tae Project manage esrnisenea 36 PAS LUMA MAKE Selectos rersncernerni 37 The User Database senan a nese nue a 38 Insert Luminaire Files into DIALUX ccceeceee eee 39 EAN PIOUS OS 39 NUE CLEMONS E AEE EE 42 The Colours Tree since version 4 3 formerly Texture De EIET EET E EEEE TE TEN EEE 43 TIVO T O E eenaa A 44 TAEC E EE ane A smencdesentes 45 MESS E PAESE A E E AAE AE E 46 FOCENO aae aa a a a a 48 Opimise Personal Seinge een dover sine aie 52 General ODUONS wiersen en e TAAT 52 Direct3D as an alternative to OpenGL n 54 Create a New Project oxic tases dodtuacetautiueisedaaaweidesiwteedes 58 Open a NeW project vscccccnmucdsnccescareaicnsestensenesbenouke wats 59 Project information in the file open dialog 60 FARO emia A A 61 EGIL ROOM GOOME WY oreert ianao oE 61 EOQUEROOM Daler EE 62 An easy method for determining maintenance factor ME A A E sine A E TA TS 63 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 4 DIALux Version 4 4 Extended method for determining maintenance factor Dee Ae aici tis cpt pase hice ease aerate Mon eee 65 Modify Properties of Individual Walls 0 08 73 Insert Room El MeNtS ccc cece ee cceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeenne ees 75 Modify a Room with Room Elements 060 75 Insert via Property PAGO saccisstimadiecastecdersdteackeeveneda
106. a e Fei ii F Fig 227 False colour Luminance DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 148 If your monitor is big enough It is advisable to keep several views open simultaneously DIALux Version 4 4 Working in Various Views DIALux provides various views to assist you with your layout Y Windoi Y ATE ECOPS Fig 228 Views toolbar You can open the various views via the toolbar illustrated The button functions are from left to right e Open 3D view Open ground plan view Open side view Open front view Zoom to the overall view of the scene for that DIALux zooms to the borderline of the room or exterior scene Show previous next light scene Show dimming levels in CAD Show maintenance factors in the CAD Activate Project manager DIALux shows the Project manager in addition to The Guide e Tile windows horizontally e Tile windows vertically In the menu file Settings gt Customise Toolbars you can activate more functions in the view s or window s toolbar see page 52 Tre aia PLURA l ja jazi Bl RS Bb 4 Pees ooeee Ash a ah 3p r BE h gE wa a i E iy imm y erans E Mm Da bi em Di Sd ima m E d i i a ea a a ee 5 ht ee iy ne p p ney Ti tae Fig 229 Working in various views The display illustrated above can be achieved by first opening the four views and then arranging the windows e g Tile Horizontally x ITOH Fig 230 Multiple view ar
107. a der Prai nEs fee eee Diii ous Humu ne Tee pec eee Paio Gr die Deer fer Prier O DE Ph siim Eag Fla ce La ar Pr ere A p gi er be Fig 407 Occupancy parameters of an assessment zone in EN 15193 left and in DIN 18599 right Within a EN planning the parameters Absence Factor and Factor for Occupancy Control can both be edited in the common way Both have even a supporting functionality to set them to typical values The parameter Occupancy Dependency Factor results trom these two parameters by expressions and formulars from the EN 15193 One can easily understand that by changing one of the first two parameters and watch the changes of the third one There is exactly one calculated value of the third parameter that results from the other ones Nevertheless the third parameter can be edited in the common way There may be special cirumstances or informations that define this parameter differently So when you edit such a parameter this will be stated in the output The documentation will include not only the edited value used for the energy evaluation but also the initially calculated value resulting from the other parameters In such cases you are well advised to state why you changed the calculated value in the description of the assessment zone If you want to return to the calculated value you can easily reset it by pressing the Reset button Within a DIN planning the Absence Factor
108. above the individual factors DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 68 DIALux Version 4 4 LS DIALux 4 1 Room 1 Floor plan L File Edit View CAD Paste Luminaire Selection Gukput MEE barg wjt ame aeg k H w gt Projektmanager Arrangernient Maintenance Factor Luminous emittance 1 Luminous emittance 2 Lale Maintenance interval Every 3 0 years Luminaire type User Defined oe arg 258 snae x Replacement interval lamps in years f O Lamp type JUserDefined I Individual replacement of defective lamps Edit individual factors manually MF D RSh W LMF M LLMF I LSF osa 0 86 0 55 x 0 33 f o Mote New values directly from manufacturer UmiIn aires Total Planing value 1553 8 17 46 Is Hew 2608 x 2049 x Fig 90 User defined maintenance factors For those maintenance factors which you have selected LMF or and LLMF the lamp type or luminaire type is selected on User defined Now you can insert directly the factors and a relevant remark On this Property Page you also have the overview for maintained and initial illuminance of the whole lighting system as well as this special arrangement Therefore you are able to optimize the maintenance plan with regard to the number of luminaires and maintenance work With another arrangement in the same room the values of the whole illuminance and those of the respective arrangement of course vary DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 69 DI
109. abtar fur die l Araia der P rhea rinti li ii Tepe gictica ele F i f T lb lisbabkior Ge die Ta gelichiversanguag DEl Fakir for de asabi abhi gigs Kkurtiich i pahalik ta Tige ed a hier gigt Keeteligeaiem Aura bert Hanuel Tape seers E aie Daa RTE der A ele cet dre iy felt Klaaaidtieung der Tagesichtwersargung Witte MoD ne 3 Witter Tagealchiquaient tir F enaine a9 Efigktrege ighb rata maior agrad ofr Breiieaqred Size Fig 415 Parameter output for an assessment zone Attention should be paid to the possibility of using descriptions for assessment zones and other energy evaluation objects These descriptions should not be too long but should frequently be used With short precise comments you can explain the selection of one or more parameter Particularly with regard to manually adjustments to automatically calculated values such explanations are in fact mandatory DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 250 DIALux Version 4 4 hamri Hadek Deh L Fig 416 Input of a description for an assessment zone DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 251 DIALux Version 4 4 STF Interface The STF interface is supported by DIALux since version 1 0 The interface is continuously extended and improved Via STF CAD programs can exchange their planning data with DIALux The workflow is normally as follows Design in the CAD application by the architect engineer Design of the building the storey or the room s If necessary
110. ads to an open source project The official site is here htto Awww xvid org Some of the codecs are offering a wide range of settings Please click on settings to define the settings for the creation of the video DIAL can not offer any support for the usage of a codec NOTE a wrong codec or the selection of uncompressed full pictures will create a very large file size for the video Start to test your codecs with small videos to find out which one and which settings are the best DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 257 Important You can open the separate POV Ray help with F1 while POV Ray is running DIALux Version 4 4 Raytracer For raytracing DIALux uses the external programme POV Ray If you want to have more detailed information about POV Ray and the possible settings you can use the F1 key to open the POV Ray help Background DIALux automatically copies POV Ray onto the PC The software will be installed when the user for the first time starts to calculate a photorealistic image The setup installs the standard version of POV Ray 3 6 This software is freeware and available at www povray org Additionally DIALux installs an adapted version of the povengine exe into the DIALux directory The major difference between the DIALux version and the original version of POV Ray Is that the DIALux version can handle real photometry of luminaires The measured light distribution of a luminaire is used to define the d
111. aees 717 MSErCFATMITU Cionna T 78 Miser FUMIO saisir Aa 78 Insert via Property Page ccccccccsesceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 78 CCAS FUNTU C ariar e Sitch aa digest ale ta Red Students 78 MPOC FUNE FICS sic actunttca EAA 81 EXTRUSION VOUS ra n cea teres eh antetos 81 S btraction Of ODJECTS serene r E EE 82 Sselecding Single Sorice orae ae 83 Windowsdan DOOS oaren 84 Insert TOM CS 20 5 cuteracdaatns itddemuaralacebsebancaeagdionmdertenoles 85 Insert via Drag amp Drop jate cetleenetieneacenehaielecins 85 Edit Placed TEXTUTE Sarien eria E EAR 85 Pelete TEKU OS oases i hes ral atcha dante alae 86 Import Textures into the Texture Tree cceee 86 Edit Room Geometry with DWG or DXF File 87 Duplicate Copy Rooms Scenes Streets cccceeeeee 88 Duplicate an Existing ROOM ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 88 Insert and Edit Luminaires and Luminaire Arrangements Ci dara eters Nite ee cee et ee ery eee a 89 Online Catalogues cccccccccceceeccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 90 Individual OMAl eI PCSesueectuis och dodonaceinurebieeGiohte ance dee 90 Aligning LUMINAIS wscecchacieasennensSensesaeatkeatanietntedentis 93 Inserting Luminaire FICIOS ccasvarssthed aciteslal nce eann ua decis 95 Inserting Luminaire LINCS ierm inesetsnaneutenlavsuntvesheels 99 POUT OMEN MS ctaactinains sateaceternneoto tt aunesanicnpeerdiecheks 101 Inserting Luminaire Circles 0 2 cece cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 101 Separating Luminaire Arr
112. ailable Automatically change to wireframe display when moving within the CAD views Recommended for older display adapters Coordinate arrows visible in 3D North arrow hidden in 0 position Abbrechen Fig 65 Graphic mode If you have an older PC it is advisable to select the Automatically change to wireframe display when moving within the CAD views option If you move within the CAD while this option is activated the room display is updated smoothly following the mouse movement After the mouse button is released the entire scene is displayed again Thus the calculation time is reduced and you can work with DIALux without disturbing jerking on the screen Hint By default the upper setting is activated If you have an efficient PC it is worthwhile trying the deactivated function We suggest you use OpenGL mode if possible If you want the X Y and Z coordinate arrows to be visible in the 3D view switch the Coordinate arrows visible in 3D option on Since DIALux 4 1 you can hide the north arrow in 0 position In the Output tab you can adjust general settings for your output that appears on the relevant pages You can specify font sizes and line thickness of the outputs in the Output tab Here you can modify the output footer and the logo For the logo please click on the three point button besides the field Logo and then select the Tile in the opening window which contains your logo DIALux o
113. aires which have not yet been used in this layout are also organised e The room consists of the following sub objects room defining surfaces floor ceiling walls work plane furniture and luminaire arrangements e An exterior scene consists of the sub objects ground element furniture and luminaire arrangements e A street consists the sub objects street elements roadways and lanes parking lanes sidewalk grass strip bicycle lane and emergency lane and the luminaire arrangement DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 36 DIALux Version 4 4 If you select one of these elements left click its properties are displayed in the Inspector A right click opens the context menu for that object just as it does in the CAD view The Luminaire Selection Another tree structure exists for the luminaire selection This becomes visible if you click on the Luminaire Selection tab at the bottom of the Project manager Propphieeee tener impar etree fete Es i pe Waist ec r r hy Coan aie Cue oa aioe PF ho rie ye 3 Double click on a Plugin to open it E jian TEL oan AE ib Pia paale at y Beret j pii r EF aa EE LET peia LEG aii COMCCRE Double click a not installed Plugin opens HITRE the internet home page ofthe manufac Bar ce turer GF Tharki igiit fl TH keri rem With a double click on the SMA online catalogues a lumi ordre ile naire can be selected of the interne
114. al graphic card drivers especially those from the chip on board cards don t have good support of OpenGL DIALux Is now also able to use Direct3D for the visualisation Several graphic card drivers offer a better support for Direct3D than for OpenGL We recommend working in OpenGL mode If some problems in the visualisation or even crashes occur you should switch over to Direct3D mode If your graphic card doesn t support this mode you will have to work in the MESA mode This is the slowest mode but it is also the most reliable The graphic mode can be selected from the Windows All Programs menu by selecting Start Options tor DIALux or you can define the standard mode for your PC in Tile gt settings gt general options gt CAD window fm DIALUx a EE ialus 4 2 BY DIALux 4 2 Light rr Start Options b F DIALux 4 2 Direct3D EE oraux 4 2 Mesa EE DiALux 4 2 OpenGL Fig 64 Start options DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 54 DIALux Version 4 4 DIALux 4 2 _ ARETA Standard Values Global CAD Window Output Contact Background Colors 20 Window 3D window inside projects 3D window outside projects ect graphics driver Modifications here are only effective after restarting DIALux O Use secure graphics mode Mesa driver Use OpenGL system driver hardware OpenGL or Microsoft Open driver Use Direct3D Driver Acct Settings Enable antes ii oie si where av
115. along one two or three axes This can be done either in the Property Pages or in the CAD To go to the scale mode in the CAD open the object s context menu right click and select the Sca e option Mo oo ee ee el a T G we a a Rotate Combine 4lign and distribute Copy Along a Line Cut Copy Paste an ee Delete Adjust Brightness Fig 243 Object context menu In the 3D view you can scale the object in the X Y or Z direction by clicking and pulling one of the rubber band lines of the selected object However if you click on one of the selected corner points you simultaneously scale in all directions In 2D views you can only scale in one dimension Combining and Saving Objects If you have inserted multiple objects in the CAD which together you wish to treat as an arrangement or to save as a new custom piece of furniture it is recommended to combine these objects in advance Objects need not touch to be combined They can also be positioned independently in the room Fig 244 Combining Objects DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 157 To move the coordinates system of an object press the A t button DIALux Version 4 4 To combine objects select them and select Combine from the context menu To save objects select them and select Save as from the context menu Important DIALux only loads furniture saved in the DIALux Furniture directo
116. alue oatha n Legit taiur a as Sal m P inaa sll a 4 Dakara Laht colour a Losha cadours See ie oo 2 Colour temoersiure black spotghis i l Wi Parbtemperaia Tagesicht ay hia lege nyp An 5 ia Shanda nn ae a dL Gy Incerdescent lames Light colour Light cokour UE hugh pressure lance ro Gite se i TE bi uti Pigh erparsune Aber Layt orim af Mir ard phage bghtng MEEN are HE oe Lee Texhoee Fig 164 Colour rendering indices of the CIE test colours CIE 13 3 The display is to specify the colour rendering and colour matching properties of light sources Standard Flourescent lamp High pressure illuminant D65 warm white 830 sodium RA 20 Fig 165 Spectra and colour rendering properties of different light sources The colour rendering index CRI sometimes called Colour Rendition Index is a measure of the ability of a light source to reproduce the colours of various objects being lit by the source It is a method devised by the International Commission on Illumination CIE The best possible rendition of colours is specified by a CRI of one hundred while the very poorest rendition is specified by a CRI of zero The CRI is measured by comparing the colour rendering of the test source to that of a perfect source which is generally a black body radiator except for sources with colour temperatures above 5000K in which case a simulated daylight e g D65 is used To add a light colour to al
117. always displayed After completing the data entry please click on Next DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 20 DIALux Version 4 4 F re doim mise le be pem ma mm ep braam mlio sg premna em Feme a aes eee mes i eee s F TA T ee a co no a i a o mmm Ha i rea Dann eium er kazen i ape O O meee PAETA ii E y UE amp ob omen ru E nes aie ian See Pepe ee ee ee eee eee eet ee arao Lite ay ee Ha E Fig 9 DIALux Light Wizard Launch a Plugin theresa Limp Ofu Found 30 DHAL Zie hehe DIAL Auf aude ohir DIAL Cptkkeechten Arbe le mamib r Barafachuner BS MM LEuchle Ipiegelraster divekestrehlesd Beehglane SLlSElect bampe bItercl Fig 10 DIALux Light Wizard User Database In the window Calculation and Results DIALux Light calculates the number of luminaires by the efficiency method that you need to achieve the desired illuminance You can enter the desired illuminance in the field Planned Em The luminaires which are outside the room are not considered by DIALux Light in the calculation By using the entry Horizontal arrangement or Vertical arrangement you can specify the distances of the luminaires to each other and from the wall After you have inserted all values correctly click on Ca culate and DIALux Light will start the calculation DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 21
118. amera area of the POV Tile the settings for the camera can be changed camera location CAMLOCATION parameter for the position is defined in the beginning of the file right lt 16 9 0 0 gt right vector of the camera up lt 0 1 0 gt up vector of the camera sky lt 0 1 0 gt Vector for the sky angle 77 viewing angle look_at CAMLOOKAT viewing direction of the camera The primary purpose of the up and right vectors is to tell POV Ray the relative height and width of the view screen In the default perspective camera these two vectors also define the initial plane of the view screen before moving it with the look_at or rotate vectors The length of the right vector together with the direction vector may also be used to control the horizontal field of view with some types of projection The look_at moditier changes both the up and right vectors The angle calculation depends on the right vector DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 270 DIALux Version 4 4 up upwards vector camera look at right right vector angle camera location image plane Fig 438 Camera look and location This picture shows the definition of the field of view The blue plane is the image plane DIALux exports those values as they are defined in the 3D view of the CAD Depending on the camera type used those values can differ See POV Ray help for more details To create a round view th
119. ample for Street Valuation Fields It is very close to a standard street from EN 13201 only luminaire positions are different The second graphic shows a more complex example The observer is placed in the side street and views towards the crossing His viewing direction ca 225 defines the calculation grid s orientation Note Reflection properties of tarmacs are only defined for close sectors If the observer is placed too close to or too far away from the surface no luminances can be calculated DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 187 DIALux Version 4 4 Road lighting Standard Streets You can use DIALux for planning standard streets You may also use a calculation of streets together with rooms or exterior scenes in one project To Insert a street in your project you can select it from the DIALux welcome screen ESS k Welcome i we Ht i ol amp Hew merar Project af DlALus Wizards lt 4p Mow Exton Proyil bo Gonan Lact Project l p7 A New Street Project Vi Gjen Provect Fi 7 7 ae rT r E fi Tir tan et ay FIUL T AY ghara Ghee dislog af ead mag am lar Fig 300 Startup dialogue DIALux New street project from the menu nsert gt New Scene gt Standard Street LS DIALux 4 1 gt File Edit View CAD APE id S Lo E Window 7 w Room Paste Luminaire Selection Qutput Luminaire Arrangement a4 Exterior Scene z Standard Street P
120. angements n 102 Modify the position of a Luminaire 00e 102 Luminaires with articulated jOInts ceeeeeee 103 Unrestricted lighting arrangements 6ccee 104 Aligning luminaire arrangements n 105 Calculation of luminaire geometry included 106 Coure NON onre nS 106 Background information eeessiieessrirreeerrrrnn 106 Lamp spectrum Light colours s es 108 COOU E S iinei aia 113 Coaction of spectral distribution of the light source ana Colour E sea NNA 114 Light colours in the ray tracing 115 Wate Dalin E seeen eena 115 Light Scenes and Control Grou ccccceeeeeeeeees 117 DELNO e a n a AA 117 RECUINGMMGT ILS asaigegitcaieutararuie nlwiladebas tangled aatertaahe nas 117 Generate a project with light scenes and control COMMIS aa Letter ees E A 117 Modify light scenes and control groups 4 124 EXPO OIONT SCENES tect see22h hot tno aston need es 126 Emergency CUNO eiei 128 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 5 DIALux Version 4 4 TOL alll Sek E ated coin eat eee rate aes 128 Escape FOULCMIGINUING niaiserie tala onias 130 Open area lighting antl PaNniC cccceeeeeeeeee es 132 High risk task area lighting 135 Luminaires with emergency lights cccceecee 135 Emergency lighting data sheet 136 Daylight calculation in DIALUX oucatice son aabind sites dv imen 137 BASICS parrene eaa A 137 SKYDE SIN DIAL eara o 137 HONT o
121. ant Fig 336 Illumination Class Wizard Complexity of Field of Vision You define the Degree of Navigational Difficulty of the traffic participant in the associated window Tlumination Class Wizard Degree of Navigational Difficulty Enter the navigational difficulty of the traffic participant Fig 337 Illumination Class Wizard Degree of Navigational Difficulty Afterwards you can select the estimated Brightness of Surroundings DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 206 DIALux Version 4 4 Illumination Class Wizard q x Brightness of Surroundings Enter the estimated luminance level of the environment Since the luminance level of the surroundings can only be estimated only broad classifications are made Medium City Environment High Innercity Environment lt Back Cancel Fig 338 Illumination Class Wizard Brightness of Surroundings The wizard indicates to you the determined illumination class in the final dialogue Upon completion of the wizard the illumination class is automatically taken over in your calculation grid in DIALux Hlumination Class Wizard Xj Frashrg the kranan Clas Wizard You have completed the wiraed ruccetifully All of the ohotometnc requeement hawe been cokcudaled bor pour street ane Cetermed iuernabon Clans ME sa Toa the ugad ard sela the caai anran Claes chek Frith chok CFR _ ccu Fig 339 Illumination Class Wizard Final dialogue
122. ation grid together with the street elements and luminaires DIALux offers the option to insert streets into exterior scenes DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 214 Insert a street into exterior scene DIALux Version 4 4 die wl iri IF i se e mii miij p e St S Se BERTE L parj Els BRE BG e x Pg bee Tei ph la hie O emi Ee r li P ha LE A a T i na d a F E J mm a ian la B nmm mo mom me meee cme cme cm mee es me ee ee ee ee aa fo eet eed reel a a en El Err SS E ees Se E f bond be eas tet te bee rt so amm 7 Fia eee ee eee gg SO eo ee ee ae e t Pus e s Fia jie im rii ri FY Lt mina GEH Fig 352 Insert street into exterior scene You can work on the individual street elements and luminaire arrangements in the same way as you did in your street project All street elements are shown in the exterior scene as ground elements B E pe g p ites ee ee l I oS a 8 b0e4 i j iia i HAER GB uE af ees nen af Pig bile e alki E Bka pr Bina ee E EE Bi Tin m Fa it Te Fia TE NTH imha WEER BNE GEH Fig 353 Street in an exterior scene Luminance Calculation according to DIN 5044 In 2005 EN 13201 was established for street lighting planning DIALux users can do street lighting planning according to that standard from version 3 1 5 But sometimes it is necessary to do planning with obsolete DIN
123. ation with the calculation Basics Since the introduction of version 4 DIALux can calculate daylight No special mode is necessary for this In exterior scenes daylight can be calculated basically and in interiors whenever windows or skylights exist in the room As a base for the calculation the DIN 5034 and the CIE publication 110 were used The sky dome is divided into parameterised luminous surfaces which get a luminance depending on the sky model location date and time By the option use direct sunlight it is also calculated with the sun as a light source The calculation occurs in the following steps 1 Calculation of the skylight on all surfaces inside and outside 2 Calculation of the direct sunlight on all surfaces 3 Calculation of the direct light of luminaires if available 4 Calculation of the indirect component DIALux does not differentiate between inside and outside calculations all surfaces are simply used for the radiative interchange If you want to do a daylight calculation in DIALux a suitable light scene must be inserted Sky types in DIALux The sky types in DIALux correspond to the CIE 110 1994 Spatial Distribution of Daylight Luminance Distributions of Various Reference Skies Thereby a luminance is assigned to every point of the sky The luminance depends on the solar height the solar azimuth the sky point height and the sky point azimuth DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 137 DIALux Version
124. auatatiass 217 35 GODAL EINS e r i eae 218 358 Monitor output of a big table eee 219 359 Print preview generation status cece 220 360 Print preview iiine i eda a A 220 30 1 UmMEreSUl COUP Easa 221 SON OUTOUT SOTIINGS oea E RE 221 363 3D CAD at the top left for editing purposes and 3D rendering as output at the bottom right 222 364 Output ot alight sceni ercan 222 365 Settings of luminaire data sheet cnc 223 366 Luminance diagram for evaluation of omni directional dare CONC haan ee ee i eae 223 367 Light intensity table cece cece cececeeeeeeee eens 224 368 Property page output exterior SCENE eee 224 369 Creating standard OUtOUtS cece ceccee eee eeeeeees 225 370 Export the output to a PDF file o n 226 371 Export the output table to a file or copy it into the GIO O Ai Oe eoti sag ch are ubice ieee diey aati iit sons 226 372 Export the output graphic to a Tile or copy it into the CHD DOS Cia asea rns rete tie etn uae nateade 227 373 Export of output graphics to other programmes 227 374 DWG DXF Import OPTIONS szccvsisontseassenaseeccassectans 228 SI OPOWV GT DAF SENOS i i A O eeueeatnes 229 376 Move the dwg dxf origin with mouse and context RE E DE E E ETE E E E 229 377 Drag the corners to align the room with the drawing NEENA AE EE ESS O P area EET E E EA 230 378 Insert doors windows TUINITUIe ceeeeeeeeeeeee 230 379 Using 2D projection of dwg dxf in 3D
125. been done a Room 1 x Summary Input Protocol Iv Luminaire parts list Maintenance plan _ Floor plan Luminaires Jayout plan Luminaires coordinates list Colour filter Jayout Furniture layout plan Furniture coordinates list Room elements layout plan Room elements coordinates list Calculation surfaces coordinates list Workplace coordinates list UGR surfaces coordinates list control group commissioning Photometric Results Fig 47 Output tree a To view an output on the screen double click on the corresponding icon To view multiple output types simultaneously right click an output icon and select Open in New Window You can view all types of output on the screen The output types which have a tick made in the checkbox are printed or displayed as print preview when the File gt Print or File gt Print Preview commands are used The observer position used in the CAD is used for the output 3D rendering You may save the 3D rendering as a jpg picture Just move the rendering into the required position and select in the menu File gt Export gt Save CAD view as JPG Here you can select a directory and enter a filename DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 44 DIALux Version 4 4 a E ET to F t mis TITLE E a8 fp a ifpan r pace EET CETE Ejea n fit mai ia ir beio ighottrey DERT z El Li Sony Geer
126. can become extremely high then e Pretrace To control the radiosity pre trace gathering step use the keywords pretrace_start and pretrace_end Each of these is followed by a decimal value between 0 0 and 1 0 which specifies the size of the blocks in the mosaic preview as a percentage of the image size The defaults are 0 08 for pretrace_start and 0 04 for pretrace_end e Gray threshold Ditfusely interreflected light is a function of the objects around the point in question Since this is recursively defined to millions of levels of recursion in any real life scene every point is illuminated at least in part by every other part of the scene Since we can t afford to compute this if we only do one bounce the calculated ambient light is very strongly affected by the colours of the objects near it This is known as colour bleed and it really happens but not as much as this calculation method would have you believe The gray_threshold float value grays it down a little to make your scene more believable A value of 6 means calculate the ambient value as 60 of the equivalent gray value calculated plus 40 of the actual value calculated At 0 this feature does nothing At 100 you always get white gray ambient light with no hue The following pictures show a spot light white directed to a green wall The first picture has a gray threshold value of 0 the second of 0 5 and the last a value of 1 Fig 427 Indirect calculation
127. ce CIE Antal bunt tine fin TOD Preura Fy Ac placement interval lamps Annually Larnp bype Dn he thors fluceacen kings Jace Cl Spee lamp roplcendee Yas Room amac maimbenanes acter 4 Luri ir rnd nance facta Dez Larne lumen manereance factor 0S3 Lamp smial Factor 1 00 Mainiunance lector Date Fichi Asanqgement DUAL 3 ES 900 Leachte Mieri of reflecting enon suefaces amall k lt 1 6 Flux drar ihu Carect Mantenancn interval of luminains Arnragaly Luntmiare type Cladted IPs Fa CE Anraal bumimg im fin 100 Purs 2ER Heplacernenl interval ampa Annually Lamin ype Triehosphonus flucescant lame dace CH Sat lamp rephicenend Ye Roum tudace mamberance facher Lira mamenang Fas be Lane lumen mainlereance ladir oo Lamp survival factor 1 00 Mainiunance lector Dat Meade shires lhe corre spending mahuto of the redoeecles nubs whee malay lumina ad Larios Fig 85 Output Maintenance plan Extended method for determining maintenance factor The user can determine if required also the maintenance factor for a singly used luminaire arrangement The extended maintenance method must be selected trom the room Property Page DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 65 DIALux Version 4 4 LS DIALux 4 1 Room 1 Floor plan iL File Edit wiew C40 Paste Luminaire Selection utp Deedes 1 8 ob BEREEGE mpk Projektmanager dF Maintenance plan method Room Surfa Al inclusive Maintenance
128. ce of individual walls you need to select the corresponding wall and then change its property in the Inspector Please keep in mind that the nspector differentiates between individual luminaires and a luminaire arrangement l La Luminaires 2j mh Individual Luminaire oi ov 1x DIAL 3 65 900 Leuchte mh Line Arrangement ff Sx DIAL 1 SINOVA mh Field Arrangement i oy 9x DIAL 18 HALOSPOT EL F 50 WJKLR EI Sh Circle Arrangement ov 4x DIAL 6 Gptikleuchten Fig 52 Luminaire arrangement and its luminaires in the project manager a Luminaire Positions Mounting height Rotations Rows Luminaires per Aiow Start Print my 0 000 mo 0 000 ri End point st 5 400 m 3 600 A Em BS Is E AGU P Em total 1191 Is Fig 53 Property Page Position of the selected luminaire arrangement DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 47 Here you can change the properties of individual luminaires within the luminaire arrangement but not the properties of the luminaire arrangement itself New in DIALux 4 3 Property Page colour appearence Switch DIALux to the Edit Room Geometry mode The Guide q Indoor Lighting Edit room E Insert New Room dxf Load DF file h Edit Room Geometry F Insert ceilings ground and columns DIALux Version 4 4 Technical Data Color appearance Rotations General 7 gt Luminous emittance 1 Lamp T26 36W Luminous Flux 2350 _ Im Po
129. ct has its own coordinate system The object can be moved by clicking and pulling on the arrow cross DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 35 DIALux Version 4 4 The Project manager Projektmanager i Be Project Contact Address Details Location Mame BEW Wermelekirchen Descrphone Date W Avdermatic ahi Project hierarchy TH J Poof surfaces E Wall surfaces J Luminaires E a Luminaire Arrangament Sy Luminaire Arrangement a Luminaire Arrangement Sy Lirsenanardnung FS Linkenanordnung H yy Linkenanordnung E n Luminaire Arrangement Eh Luminaire Arrangement Hh Luminaire Arrangement Ej K Luminare Arangament B Lirgenanordnuing Eo is Ea Einzelanordnupe Fig 38 Project manager The Project manager enables a fast workflow with the elements used in your lighting design Each individual element can be selected and its properties can be viewed and modified in the nspector The Project manager includes the nspector and the respective tree structure project furniture colour luminaire selection and output The project in this example called BEW Wermels kirchen organises the global project information such as the name and address of the operator and the customer as well as all rooms exterior scenes streets and luminaires In the luminaire list all luminaires used in this project are listed which were selected from a Plugin via Use Here the alternative lumin
130. d Main Users and Other Users Afterwards you enter the typical weather DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 203 DIALux Version 4 4 Illumination Class Wizard Hain Weather Type Enter the typical weather Fig 332 Illumination Class Wizard Main Weather Type In the window nterchanges you choose the kind and frequency of the interchanges Tlumination Class Wizard interchanges Enter the type and frequency of the interchanges teen ange denat lt a Pieces per Em Hi 3 pieces per km Fig 333 Illumination Class Wizard Interchanges Specify the traffic flow of motorised vehicles if it concerns vehicles tor motorised traffic DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 204 DIALux Version 4 4 Illumination Class Wizard Traffic Flow of Motorised Yehicles Enter the number of vehicles that pass a defined point in a defined time usually one day Fig 334 Illumination Class Wizard Traffic Flow of Motorised Vehicles In the window Conflict Zone select whether a conflict zone exists or not Illumination Class Wizard Conflict one Enter whether or not to take a conflict zone into consideration Fig 335 Illumination Class Wizard Conflict Zone Specify the Complexity of Field of Vision DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 205 DIALux Version 4 4 Illumination Class Wizard Complexity of Field of Vision Enter the complexity of the field of vision of the traffic particip
131. d Line command This is now written into the command line in the top of the PovRay editor Clicking on run starts the PovRay raytracing PLEASE KEEP IN MIND a 10 second movie with 25 FPS frames per second has 250 pictures to be calculated If one picture takes a minute you will wait 250 minutes or 4 hours and ten minutes Animation with the clock parameter With POV Ray also animation of scenes can be created Up to now only static images with fixed camera position and viewing direction have been made The following settings are defining camera position and viewing direction declare CAMLOCATION lt 1 5 1 7 2 6 gt declare CAMLOOKAT lt 6 4 1 7 7 6 gt It is important to know that X Y and Z are not the same directions as they are in DIALux Y and Z are changed compared with DIALux With the following command lines you can prepare POV Ray for creating animations DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 273 DIALux Version 4 4 Fila en ey SBAA New Open Sai Close Queue Rerun Hide 320x240 Animation a Messages DIALux pov camera location CAMLOCATION right lt 1 33333 0 0 gt up lt 0 1 0 gt sky lt 0 1 0 gt angle 77 Took at CAMLOOKAT translate CAMLOCATION rotate lt 0 clock 360 0 gt translate CAMLOCATION union mhi ert Fig 442 Animation settings The camera will be rotated around the upwards axis Because of that we will have a look around the room Rotate lt 0 clock 360 0 gt de
132. d end point DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 167 DIALux Version 4 4 G a eo pes fe lie Bie be nm mas i F FEEFEE Pe a fri a CEE paroj MELE METE am tsa amp FADA 7 i p S ml rE bi oi i ma I i m r a a i L i i i EN pe E i z Bs B d e m ge em hm ae a h oon Mc aes a a yl l Fig 265 A closed spline help line In the start and end point are draggers to change the line To move the complete spline help line after it is defined once hold down the ALT key while the mouse is above one vertex and holding down the left mouse button G e p pes fel lis Zh baa a E ee bal a i abima pai p Ho 4 tif LLET E LEi A PIER Y 1 pEi E d ana Eal a ht l a be iE pram tee L3 F 1 a a E e de i a Canh Ful 5 O ie Fig 266 Move the complete poly line by holding down the ALT key Circular help line The circular help line can be placed by first defining the mid point and then the radius Copy along a help line Any help line can be used to be the copy and paste path of any object Any object and any object combination can be copied along a help line e g furniture luminaires Calc surface furniture To start that function the help line has to be available in the scene The object that has to be copied along a help line has to be in the scene as well If you want to copy combined objects you have to place them correc
133. d the position of the last copy hk Cl i ieee Ge ee a I i r i a a ia T Es PEE TE eer he Far iw iat aie a d ba a is ite is E Fig 275 Copy along a line with the inspector Align and distribute It is often necessary when planning and positioning several different objects to achieve a flush surface or to adjust them vertically and horizontally to achieve a regular arrangement or a neat appearance to the ceiling In DIALux you can edit this in the context menu of the marked objects or in the menu Edit gt Align and distribute DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 172 DIALux Version 4 4 alti hk fe ke WH ft pee Pe ee idee se ao 8 LITLE l i panj fl VERT MA uke af eee coee ASG K ca ee oe ee ary fo i D riimi eed CF apang p aS ee i Cited ri ems Se J bebini n riker oes E Melati P CELE m Te Baggs ad a neisi dehi a ra oi i Fig 276 Context menu CAD Align and distribute aleiz EE p ji j a a Jaji r J eh a a i J saz le RS ankle af o9 6060 0 taf a eE ees ee dba ij i ti F i a i TI ee eee E Je Tria oi Fis a j Ba a Sa arini arhi a mi Fig 277 Menu Edit Align and distribute Da Centre objects in the room This is a very useful tool to centre luminaires separated by a modular spacing for example a 600mm ceiling grid in the middle of a room The luminaire arrangement will be placed in the middl
134. e luminaires to CO Gamma0O and C90 Gamma O the illumination point can be also aligned optionally to the maximum luminous intensity max hin fF aS fs eee ae re TN Ba oe F Bs theca ees CObAe T aa ou eee ee Ree oo ae Ee nsi tal a i i E lj E m z I alll z m i k Set ee ee mm Ta F nine 1 Fig 134 Mouse mode to define illumination point To set the illumination point you have to select a single luminaire first Maybe you even have to activate the single luminaire selection to select a luminaire inside of a luminaire arrangement ee e ae a ie o e ee fe ed a Eg ae een af i i dial i ao o BALS jj ae r A Pri Pre np em pr Ere Sn i ee demi E Amem fp Tem Fhe hi oe Biu ee Ba mmie i ge beram Se eo LANE MEi ER DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 94 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 135 Selection of individual luminaires When you have selected the single luminaire you can use the mouse mode Set illumination point and click on the position surface or furniture you want to illuminate idd a th ee 8 eo pec ff eee fs Ot SRD DB ave afhees coea T te ee ee a mite doe eee w j EEN a ee Pei oiae piae iee a Fm rii jiii FY ae a ae Fig 136 Align a spotlight to a picture Inserting Luminaire Fields Luminaire fields can be positioned either by selecting the Insert Luminaire Field option in The Guide or the Luminaire
135. e 198 DIALux Version 4 4 Projektmanager General Street Coating Observer Surfaces Material Texture Raytracer_4 r Color Reflection Material Fig 324 Properties of a roadway Surfaces In the default setting median parking lane and grass strip have no valuation field Nevertheless this can be inserted while the respective street element is marked in the Project manager and with the right mouse button the option nsert Valuation Field is chosen ECES inert 1 Fler plan Ce fhe Cit yew CAD Bote Luminaire Selection Quit Window aaa a ee 7 FALIDA iama OGL ET Ly Street i Floor pli ipa yj mosi a Lister Lii i Greet l i af Sdk Saf Erde Lene E Lipi 2 H a Cmergency Lane i L im af aan ioe 1 a aif Brathay 2 al d GE mn af Lyt 1 Coal Erinn Fig 325 Insert valuation field via context menu Similarly a valuation field can be deleted or renamed by means of right mouse button The new EN allows the use of common valuation fields for different roadway elements In the wizard this is possible by choosing the suitable checkbox If additional validation fields are selected several more steps are necessary DIALux defines for every surface except median parking lane and grass strip a valuation field Now if you want to have for example a bicycle lane and a sidewalk with a common valuation field you must first cancel the e
136. e 66 DIALux Version 4 4 Both the initial illuminance and the maintained illuminance will be indicated as in the easy method Also the initial and maintained illuminance of the whole room is shown The user can see the contribution of this luminaire arrangement compared with the layout in the whole room In this case the values are different because other luminaires are in the room DULALI 4 1 Room i tloor plan CUG Ge Ea yew CAD pmte Luminaire Selection Quipu Da i JLO niaan a LI2 2 Projekimanager Fieri Zz Luminaires pet Flow 1 Sjal Pond joom in w aoa in End pont zE m EET m E mo Suain Larvae Total Plaring weary 1713k 7506 be Mew Hih A bi Mourning Ferie Supra iii ii Fig 88 Determination of the number of required luminaires To access the Property Page Maintenance factor right click on an item below Luminaires in the Inspector for example Field Arrangement or Individual Luminaire then from the context menu select Edit maintenance Factor All parameters can be edited associated with maintenance factor for this luminaire If a luminaire has several LEOs their parameters can likewise be individually edited DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 67 DIALux Version 4 4 SDIALux 4 1 Room 1 Floor plan L File Edit View CAD Paste Luminaire Selection Gutput oF lo od Bwana Bs ome ISB GBB Ls o e Projektmanager Arrangement Maintenance factor Luminous emittance 1 Lumino
137. e Ctrl key you can modify the X and Y positions In the 3D view the point of intersection of the three positioning lines shows the position of the cross projected onto the floor surface Since DIALux 4 4 it is also possible to move an object not only by its insertion point but also by dragging the corners of the bounding box The benefits are that it Is now very easy to place one object directly next to another one and the object automatically rotates itself to get the same rotation as the object has where it is dragged to DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 153 To change the working area in the 3D view oppress the spacebar while the left mouse button Is pressed and the mouse icon is above the area you would like the working area to be space To deactivate the preset pick grid press the shift button DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 237 Dragging an object by its corners and automatic rotation Using any surface as a working surface In the 3D view an object can be moved by the mouse The working surface is fixed as a parallel surface to the X Y area normally parallel to the floor This can temporarily be changed if the SPACEBAR is hit while the mouse together with the object is in front of any other surface and the left mousebutton Is pressed Example You click left on a cube and move it towards a wall Make sure that the mouse icon is in front of the wall Now hit the space bar on the keyboard The wall will become the work
138. e Edit wiew CAD Luminaire Selection Gutput Window 7 Doe Hig BA New Scene J me i is Th HRS Luminaire Arrangement iih 4 Ma Furniture La Lay bys n Maintenance pla Room elements a Sidewalk x Us Windows and doors Exterior scene elements Grass Strip a Bicycle Lane Emergency Lane 2 Lun Calculation surfaces Calculation points od Textures Control group g Light scenes as E Project 1 atiy Luminaires Used aie 0 00 Flay Street 1 cae Roadway 1 Fig 319 Insert street elements via menu or by means of the right mouse in the context menu of the street DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 196 DIALux Version 4 4 SI ALuM i Street i Toor plan i Be ok pe CD pee lumen geen Gap yie I fa IE ETSE a JALIN Slt vo GPiza c TT L Street 1 Floor El Gl resect Sh umna Used a j H gf ea Tuet Sinet Arraren __ neet Sreet Demat Ineert Street into Diteror Soene A Sik at a Gye Lane v W aeli Views FH m Eime LA G eo Plan 9 bevel Symbolik FY G larbw Pagan ate Sires Scere aes are Lai Fig 320 Insert street elements via context menu When you select a single street element in the Project manager or in the CAD view you can see and modity the properties in the nspector Projektmanager General Street Coating Mame Roadway 1 Width 4 000 ri Number of Lanes 2 Fig 321 Properti
139. e POV Ray website and the online copy of this document at http Awww povray org povlegal html for the current email address of the team leader Unfortunately we cannot include it here as we have to change it from time to time due to spam email being sent to the address The following postal address is only to be used for official license business when emailing is impossible We do not provide technical support We will not mail you disks with updated versions Please do not send money If you want to know how to support us please see http Awww povray org supporting povray html POV Team C O Hallam Oaks P L PO Box 407 Williamstown Victoria 3016 Australia MESA Copyright C 1999 2003 Brian Paul All Rights Reserved THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL BRIAN PAUL BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Registered Trademarks Microsoft MS Windows Windows NT Win32 are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries Adobe Acrobat Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems INC POV Ray Persistence of Vision POV Team and POV H
140. e Property Page for the luminaire arrangement insert open area lighting Edit Calculation Surface Align and distribute Copy Along a Line Cut Copy Delete Set DWG or DXF origin here Selection hidden Fig 204 Insert open area lighting DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 133 DIALux Version 4 4 pi Luminaire Emergency Lighting 2 Anti panic lighting luminaire distance max distance CO C180 12 71 mi max distance C90 C270 19 06 Im max distance border C180 4 73 m max distance border C90 4 73 mi Anti panic lighting Emin 0 5 lx Uniformity 40 i Suggestion Luminaire Mounting Mounting Type cacao mauiad Suspension Height Mounting Height Rotation Room Height 2 800 m roo Fig 205 Properties of the open area luminaire arrangement This tool calculates the maximum distance for the selected fittings taking into account the desired minimum illuminance level and uniformity You can see here the maximum distance lengthwise and crosswise between the luminaires and between luminaires and the border of the open area calculation surface The arrangement will be placed symmetrically above the open area surface To calculate the open area which means the unobstructed floor you have to select in the calculation setting not to take the furniture into account Start Calculation Select scenes Scenes to be Calculated V
141. e camera type cylinder is useful Especially in exterior scenes interesting views can be created To define such a view the user has to enter the command cylinder 1 in the area of camera Use 180 for the angle It is important to select a correct image size If you want to have a picture of 500 to 120 the picture ratio has to be 4 2666 The following image is calculated with a 180 degree viewing angle and a cylindrical camera Fig 439 Exterior scene visualisation DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 271 DIALux Version 4 4 ae Ray for Windows Ea at Tet ame Insert Render Options Tools GUPEstensions Help Soc AA Q ec bre CAML CRs T FII 4 Tobai Settings m i entai ighe AMETENTLIGHT nibble ph cama gakm nk Haiman loe_velue 6 hy Carer ik i ey li rade leearian CaM ix T Tok right T up i Teak AT i p Ma angle pan ahier Fig 440 Settings camera location Animation Animation with Keyframes You can create videos in DIALux with selecting Menu gt File gt Export gt Save 3D Video You have to define a camera path and several other parameter see Making videos in DIALux If you create a PovRay visualisation after defining the camera path most of the work for making a PovRay video is done Load the created pov file into the PovRay editor Make sure that you use the pvengine exe in the DIALux subfolder Look for the green lines in the pov Tile
142. e list Projektmanager y Luminaire Optimization Luminaire DAL 29 Mastautsatzleuchte 1 HME Sly Luminous emittance 1 Lamp HME a Luminous Elus aooo Im i EE Power Correction Correction Fig 343 Insert Street Arrangement Luminaire The Property Page Luminaire allows you a choice of luminaires as well as the entry of technical data for the luminous emittance DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 209 DIALux Version 4 4 Projektmanager E Luminaire Pole Boom Optimization Boom Boor Length al ooon m Boom Inclination b joo Overhang oso m Distance Fole to foso m Angle of Rotation foo Fole Arrangement Mounting Height fo oo0 mi Height above a299 m Humber of Luminaires i Pole Distance 16 000 m Longitudinal Fig 344 Insert Street Arrangement Boom properties and pole arrangement In the Property Page Pole Boom you can define specific properties of the boom as well as the pole arrangement The drawing in Fig 344 illustrates the Boom Length and Boom Inclination The Overhang defines how far the middle of the luminaire plane centre of gravity of the luminaire overlaps the roadway The Distance Pole to Roadway is measured between the root point of the pole and the border of the roadway Additionally you can specify the Pole Arrangement here A good way to get the optimal distance between the luminaires is to use the Property Page Optimisation Und
143. e list contains all output types including those of lower hierarchy levels For example if you check the Isolines E output type in this hierarchy level it is also checked in all lower hierarchical levels You can now select lower hierarchical levels and use a different output standard here For example you can select Room 1 and select the Complete Documentation standard which in this example describes a very extensive documentation The other rooms are not affected by this change as these still use the Short Documentation output standard which has previously been assigned to the project Thus you can influence the individual output subdirectories thereby deviating from the global standard Of course you additionally have the option of selecting the output types individually for every object in the output tree To use a user defined output standard as default setting select it from the Name listbox and click on the As Standard button In the listbox the phrase Standard appears in brackets behind the corresponding name To delete a user defined standard select it and click on Delete After another standard has been selected from the listbox the one deleted previously is not available anymore DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 225 DIALux Version 4 4 Save Output as PDF File Similar to the printing you also can export the output to a PDF file After you selected all desired information with the small printer symbol you select
144. e of the room after defining the number of luminaires and the distance between them E ee ae zm lee Sepia ieee J a5 um Loa am i bt a im eas i om m a fe B ee ee a 1 7 c ou amma biam E om Ta 1 r n ammm m eee o oe m Ba uas q oe a 7 p a ima i EEE i en ere 7 Fig 278 Align and distribute centred in space DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 173 DIALux Version 4 4 Editing Calculation In the furniture tree you can insert calculation surfaces or task area in DIALux To do this simply select Calculation surfaces and move the appropriate object via Drag amp Drop into a CAD window E E FE aS Ps Se ee Jged eit ee Phos i j Juach PaE E Rie wf eee coe wal oe ee a ew alsin bami a fa aae i ra Dee rS SEN r Ha ea z Er Sik mim bs B e iE ET Fig 279 Inserting calculation surfaces or task areas Calculation Surfaces ij oam 1 30 ves li Fire plir f ee eee Mu Fig 280 Transparent calculation surfaces A calculation surface is an area in which the illuminance can be measured without affecting the light distribution themselves Various calculation surface norms exist for instance the work plane the correct reading level for hospitals etc A calculation surface is displayed as a transparent Surface as the example shows The surface which appears transparent Is the surface which provides
145. ed DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 165 DIALux Version 4 4 Help lines are not printed out To insert a help line just press the icon or use the command Insert gt Help lines gen ini SS a a a amp 4 Ch BL BB iS Fig 259 Icons to insert help lines Simple help lines The simple help line is useful to align objects Moving an object towards the help line it will be automatically snapped on the help line when a specific distance Is reached To avoid the snap temporarily just hold down the SHIFT key To avoid the snap continuously switch of the icon for the help line snap mots Fig 260 Icons to switch on and off the snap to help lines A help line is defined by clicking for the starting position and again clicking for the end position Teer E CTT TERS CT Linte ee oe i ee ee a i fee ald a ot ae a LESA Tim LEE i a Fig 261 Inserting a help line In the inspector you can see the numeric values of start and end point Further on you can see the angle the help line is rotated compared to the horizontal and the vertical axis of the 2D view That s way the axes changes from ground to side views The possibility to create parallel lines is also very useful Just enter the number of parallel lines you need and the distance they should have To delete help lines just select and press the del ete key or select delete trom the context menu Help lines can be selected to be
146. ed luminous flux of the luminaires Luminous Flus 3390 m Fig 24 Working with Wizards Luminaire Selection DIALux displays the selected luminaire in the dialogue of Luminaire Selection Quick Planning Wizard E x Mounting height Specify the mounting height for the luminaire arrangement i Select the luminaire s mounting type Mounting Type Surface M ounted Modify the mounting height via one of the following parameters Suspension Height fo m Height above pss Workplane Mounting Height 2 800 mi Workplane Height 0 850 m Room Height 2 800 m Luminaire height 0 074 m Preview lt Back Fig 25 Working with Wizards Mounting height Select the uminaire s mounting type Quick Planning Wizard l Quantity Calculate the number of luminaires required by specitying a desired average illumination or provide the quantity values yourself Enter the desired ate average illumination Previeit Em S00 E Or alternatively the desired number of rows and luminaires per row Rows 4 Luminaires per Aow f Back Cancel Fig 26 Working with Wizards Calculate the number of luminaires DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 29 DIALux Version 4 4 On the basis of the efficiency method DIALux calculates the necessary number of luminaires for a specified illumination The luminaires which are outside the room are not considered in the calculation
147. efore you have created it If the DIALux project becomes bigger a good graphic card is absolutely necessary We recommend a Nvidia graphic card with a memory of at least 128MB If you are working in MESA mode and the DIALux project is DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 256 DIALux Version 4 4 complex a lot of objects a large area the 3D CAD will soon start to judder Clicking on Create video will open a Save As dialog The location and the filename have to be selected here After that a standard windows dialog appears where the user can select the video codec to compress the movie Videokomprimierung Fig 422 Windows dialog for the video compression settings In the drop down list all the codecs installed on the computer will be listed These codecs are not installed by DIALux The quality of the codec is responsible for the quality of the video The better a codec is the smaller the size of the Tile will be and the higher the quality of the video will be Some of the codecs are free of charge The codec has to be installed on the computer that creates the movie and on the computer that plays the movie Microsoft XP already includes several codecs These are available on all the XP machines if they were not deselected during the installation of the operating system Some codecs are available from the internet For example from here www divx com or here http Awww divx digest com sottware xvid html The last link le
148. eger number of rays that are sent out whenever a new radiosity value has to be calculated is given by count A value of 35 is the default the maximum is 1600 When this value is too low the light level will tend to look a little bit blotchy as if the surfaces you re looking at were slightly warped If this is not important to your scene as in the case that you have a bump map or if you have a strong texture then by all means use a lower number Error bound The error bound float value is one of the two main speed quality tuning values the other is of course the number of rays shot In an ideal world this would be the only value needed It is intended to mean the fraction of errors tolerated For example if it were set to 1 the algorithm would not calculate a new value until the error on the last one was estimated at as high as 100 Ignoring the error introduced by rotation for the moment on flat surfaces this is equal to the fraction of the reuse distance which in turn is the distance to the closest item hit If you have an old sample on the floor 10 inches from a wall an error bound of 0 5 will get you a new sample at a distance of about 5 inches from the wall The default value of 1 8 is good for a smooth general lighting effect Using lower values is more accurate but requires a higher count You can DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 262 DIALux Version 4 4 use values even lower than 0 1 but both render time and memory use
149. elengths The colour that the user wants to use has to be part of the spectral radiation of the light source For example there is only a small amount of blue light in the spectral distribution of incandescent lamps To get a high saturation of blue light another light source would be better In DIALux there are several hundred colour filters available These are clear filters which had their spectral radiation measured in the photometric laboratory of DIAL According to the usage of these filters they are stored in subfolders in the DIALux colour tree The numbering is according to the numbering of the available product In the preview you can see the colour appearance and the transmission factor when used with standard illuminant D65 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 113 DIALux Version 4 4 Transmission factor using D65 Colour appearance Using D65 LE ih TILEF 2 FEEFEE HE eo ee F l Fig 170 Technical information of colour filter To add a filter to a luminaire just drag and drop it onto it All luminaires within the arrangement field line circle or single get that filter To add a filter just to a single luminaire within the arrangement Just hold down the SHIFT key while dragging and dropping it The luminaires show the replacement of a filter with blinking for a short time and the light emitting surface will appear in the colour of the filter if available including the colour of the light source If you
150. elp are trademarks of the POV Team Any other trademarks referred to herein are the property of their respective holders DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 2 DIALux Version 4 4 DIALux Version 4 4 The Software Standard for Calculating Lighting Layouts Function Overview Welcome to DIALux 4 4 This manual is intended to assist you to work fast and effectively with DIALux If you have experience with Windows applications getting started in DIALux will present no problem DIAL regularly offer courses where the professional use of DIALux can be learned Information regarding the course dates and contents are available under www dialux com and www dial de or 49 0 2351 1064 360 Latest information and updates are also available on our homepage In the following you will find a short description of the functions available in DIALux DIALux offers a number of textures that you are free to use for your lighting layouts The following companies provided those textures e Texturenliste SuperFinish Immobiliendarstellungen Jochen Schroeder www immobiliendarstellung de e Arroway Texturen www arroway de e Ulf Theis www ulf theis de e Texturenland Konstantin Gross www texturenland de e Noctua Graphics Herbert Fahrnholz www noctua graphics de e Thermopal www thermopal de e Rathscheck Schiefer und Dachsysteme KG www rathscheck de They offer many more textures Check their websites for further textures DIA
151. elping areas in the ruler You can create those helping areas by double clicking in the position of the ruler or drag and drop the helping area from the ruler into the CAD It is called helping area because it is active in two dimensions If you place an helping area in the ground plan view parallel two the X axis it will be available in the side view as a parallel line facing trom top to bottom as well If you place an helping area parallel to the Y axis it will be visible in the front view Having them available in two views makes it easy to place objects not only in a desired position but also in a correct height If there are already objects in the CAD window available the helping areas can be snapped to those objects as well Working with help lines Help lines are objects which can be placed in any 2D view When they are placed in the ground plan view they are only visible in this view not in any other 2D or 3D view They are meant to align objects to them or to place objects on them Moving an object towards a help line the snap will work on the bounding box and on the objects origin If a object is moved wth the mouse on the bounding box dragger also the rotation of the object is align to follow the help line This will not happen if the object is dragged by its origin Fig 258 In the left scetch the object is moved on its origin on the right it is moved on the bounding box In the second case the rotation is adjust
152. empty rectangular room If you work on an exterior scene create that o Goto the ground plan view o From the menu File mport use the option DWG or DXF File The wizard asks you to select the dwg or dxf file Wizard for importing a DWG or DXF file as planning support ete Welcome to the CAD drawing import wizard This wizard supports you when importing and adjusting a CAD drawing Selection of a DWG or DXF file to be imported Defining the units Defining the planning origin To continue dick Next Fig 374 DWG DXF Import options o Let the wizard read the dxf file o The units used in the dwg dxf file are not yet defined When you select the probable unit the size of the drawing is listed in two fields o You can place the origin of the planning at the origin of the global coordinates system 0 00 0 00 0 00 or you can choose a point defined in the dxf file or you can place the origin at the gravity centre of the used area the middle of the drawing Basic DWG DXF Settings and Layer Selection With the menu CAD you can change the properties of the dwg dxf file and of the layers similar to the CAD program You can decide to show or hide single layers and to set the layer colour If a layer of the dxf file uses a certain colour you may overwrite this colour DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 228 DIALux Version 4 4 Projektmanager _ ST P Filename Layer Coordinates system LCS Scale DXF Snap
153. ength and width All lengths are then correspondingly transformed Please note that in the previous example Fig 56 the luminaire at the bottom right will not be displayed or calculated after the new coordinates have been applied If however the room is enlarged again the luminaire is automatically reinserted You can edit ground elements of an exterior scene in a similar way To insert a ground element into the exterior scene use The Guide or the furniture tree T JE ei paan p F 7 Jah Dee we i i I acl Gls VERSE E Bs Ee aff Peer tos oe Ti ee ie J mr Fig 58 Edit a ground element DIALux can handle calculation surfaces with any shapes You can click with the right mouse button to edit the calculation surface For example you may create a polygonal task area above a polygonal desk DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 50 DIALux Version 4 4 Eim pE i ieee ef rrr fesows E i hanl MEA E aE _Paimaaan ee a ee uia LEE mes PO Fig 59 Create a polygonal Task Area above a desk If there are already placed help lines in the room or exterior scene available their shape can be used for the surface which is currently in the edit mode This is very helpful if firstly the shape of a template DXF DWG has been copied with a helpline and secondly this shape should be taken over for the surface room ground element calculation surface or extrusion volume This function is started when making a righ
154. er you may wish to activate all outputs DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 22 DIALux Version 4 4 TLS ios Ln aed ee Smee yi a ee Pa ea at eed i PP le a ced Hae ret ie i SD rr ile ig ba ee SP ee eth OS muras Piai Em Web pine i ar Fiir z T tig 7 g wom E fi we Fen P pas wr Li 2 Rounder Sora Bis iren G sm hii hj ln g de Le d ih gy Pee O A Eile hs g ee Om Li a ae el Lal Pasas Gerigpaties Cc amaii Factor da i LE La iid aes Fig ells serra ed kaad WAL SE Mel SA eee AT ea PEU re Fig 14 DIALux Light Wizard Output At the end of the DIALux Light Wizard a dialogue is displayed After you have completed DIALux Light the calculated result is displayed as 3D rendering in DIALux Here you have the option to save your calculation results under the menu File gt Save DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 23 DIALux Version 4 4 YAN a La ail sirj Ena of the DIAL Light wirned ae as ee h es eE er ee ee Agog pad io phere pier Fig 15 DIALux Light Wizard End DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 24 DIALux Version 4 4 Working with Wizards If you are using DIALux for the first time and you do not have much experience with CAD programs we recommend that you create your first projects with the help of our wizards Experienced users can skip this chapter Ppt amp bee ieee ree EE Ss 1 i i i i l _ 2 8 See eee Fig 16 DIALux Sta
155. er Arrangement Type you can define the place along the street where you want to install the luminaires A list of arrangement types are available to you DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 210 DIALux Version 4 4 Projektmanager Luminaire Pole Boom Optimization Arrangemen Single row top Double row opposing Parameter M Pole Distance C Height above working plane C Overhang Fig 345 Insert Street Arrangement Select the arrangement type In the valuation field you can specify the photometric values of the roadway illumination class and condition In this Property Page the minimum values to be reached for the illumination class are already entered If you wanted to optimise on other values enter here the desired limit values You activate the optimisation via the Start Optimisation button Be aware that if you optimise many parameters at the same time the calculation time can take several minutes ee Saas Type Single row top ba r Valuation Field Valuation Field Roadway 1 Start Optimisation top F Pole Distance L Height above working plane C Overhang Fig 346 Insert Street Arrangement Optimisation Valuation Field Then DIALux calculates according to the choice and weighting of the parameters the optimal pole distance DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 211 DIALux Version 4 4 the height above working plane the overhang and the slope The checkbox provides for
156. ere japa oan diy fhe piei Lusrarenss Fiac E Fig 22 Working with Wizards Luminaire Manufacturer Selection If you click in the dialogue of Luminaire Selection on Databases you can launch the installed Plugins or start the User Database Always a few luminaires are arranged in the user database In the user database you can save your favoured luminaires in order to have fast access to your frequently used luminaires General Limp Cree Found 30 DHAL SHOA i j Wher h lurdnaire ane you lookong for 7 i fies Taiti Dag Sha higechha i z Arbek aribar B irathc hurar DL Aytouit ohir 5 OVAL Copier LAL A i mai BS Fie Leuchle mit BAP Ta Luvana Type Ipiegelragper Exar divekestrahlesd Beehglane elemieet Lampe LagUr i Fig 23 Working with Wizards Plugin User Database Select the desired luminaire with the help of the filter functions of a Plugin or the user database and then click on the button Apply Then please click on the Close button DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 28 DIALux Version 4 4 Quick Planning Wizard Luminaire Selection Select a luminaire for the arrangement from your favourites or search the installed database for a suitable luminaire Please select the luminaire to be used Luminaire DIAL 36S J00 Leuchte Databases Select the quantity here DIAL Luminous emittance 1 Lamp fi x T26 SBM Here you can modify the provid
157. ergy evaluation in menu Output 247 409 Start of an energy evaluation with the icon of the Same name second from left 6 6 247 410 An assessement zone that is added to another assessemMent ZOMG sorire 248 411 An assessment zone that is added to the superordinate utilisation ZONE 248 412 Outputs for an energy evaluation cee 249 413 Output for the complete energy evaluation project with all important characteristics 249 414 Property page of the above output page 250 415 Parameter output for an assessment zone 250 416 Input of a description for an assessment zone 251 417 Inserting a camera path in the 3D view 253 418 Inserting additional camera positions along the path Siebel Raat ested AEAEE EAEE tna tas 253 419 Deleting camera POSITIONS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 254 420 Defining the camera viewing direction 04 255 AZ Setn OF ING MICE sean a aR 256 422 Windows dialog for the video compression settings PE PE ants aces EEE eae 257 423 Basic settings for Raytracing cccceecccceeeeeeeeeeees 259 424 Smoothing edges with POV Ray 0cceccceeeees 260 425 POV Ray Image preference cccceee eee ees 261 426 POV Ray Indirect calculation 262 AZT NONE Cal CUA OR neona a ceo 263 428 POV Ray Brightness preferences 264 429 Raytracing options modify the surfaces 265 4
158. es i Weiter gt Abbrechen Fig 2 Selection of the components to be installed Installation from CD If you want to install DIALux from our CD insert the DIALux CD and automatically a welcome screen starts You can then click on install DIALux If the installation program finds that your Microsoft Internet Explorer is later than version 5 5 you will be requested to install a newer version DIAL DIAL Ux Fig 3 DIALux CD browser DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 13 DIALux Version 4 4 Online Menu Online Update In DIALux you will find a new menu named Online hm Gr Hiep erect arri mahar and fredback i Sere pmen rrot H Bi Fig 4 DIALux online menu In that new menu there are several useful features listed to contact DIAL After selecting Online Update DIALux automatically checks for newer versions of the software and for new online Plugins Manage Newsletter subscription Here you can enter your email address to subscribe or unsubscribe to the regular DIALux newsletter It informs you about new versions and possibilities of DIALux It Is sent out every 6 to 8 weeks Wishes and Feedback Send problem report Maybe during working with DIALux you consider that an important feature Is missing Click on wishes and feedback and tell us what you need If a problem or even a crash occurs while using DIALux click on the Online men
159. es and by the environment are the basic criteria The latter is handled differently by EN 12464 2 In DIALux you can choose whether you want to use the simplified method of EN or the complete method of CIE The simplified method approximates the veiling luminance produced by the environment Lve with the formula L 0 035 x p x Eha X mt where p is the average reflection and E the average illuminance of the area Unfortunately this area Is not exactly defined DIALux uses all ground elements as the area The complete method of CIE 112 1994 uses the correct veiling luminance produced by the environment in front of an observer Here the illuminated area is considered to consist of an infinite number of small light sources The veiling luminance produced by the environment is L L y defined by the formula L 10 gt gt where n is the i l i total number of small light sources Of course this calculation is more accurate but more time consuming too The DIALux outputs state which method was used to calculate GR values Name GR Observer Position of GR observer elea la wl 2768s a aliso la Angle of inclination 2 4 Step width 15 0 Viewing angles from 00 to 360 0 Simplified calculation according to EN8599 exact calculation according to CIE 112 Fig 293 Property page of the GR Observer To calculate GR values DIALux provides the GR observer tab Any GR observer can be placed just like any
160. es of a roadway General For example the properties of the roadway can look like e Width 4 000m e Number of lanes 2 e resulting width of alane 2 000m The tarmac and the luminance coefficient can be modified in the Property Page Street Coating DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 197 DIALux Version 4 4 Projektmanager F General Street Coating Observer Surfaces Tarmac R3 q 0 070 Uniformity Coating on Wet Roadways w3 a o 200 Fig 322 Properties of a roadway Street coating Each street has an observer whose average age can be varied individually for the calculation of TI Projektmanager r A E _ General a Street Coating Observer Surfaces Average age of observer 23 Years Postion of observer Fig 323 Properties of a roadway Observer DIALux positions the observers automatically according to the default of the EN The observer is always 60m in front of the valuation field in the middle of the respective roadway at a height of 1 5m above the ground Normally every roadway has an observer who looks in the direction of the driving direction On the basis of the resulting symmetries a rotation of the observation direction is not necessary The Property Page Surfaces offers the possibility to set material texture and Raytracer Options All settings only have an effect on the visualisation but not on the calculation results DIAL GmbH L denscheid pag
161. esn t show the daylight quotients but just the illumination in the Suitable positions Also the outputs for Drin Dmax aNd Dm need to be shown as percentage values DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 140 DIALux Version 4 4 Room 1 Light scene 1 Workplane Value Chart E 360m At ZH TG SS 52 252 1 J61 5i i 4 E0 e0 E0 di S Je BOE me Z 1 Jl e i E0 i E0 iit OE A32 Hen a a M 2 Ae BG 205 HE S 56 7 S S0750 SO Se l eE OS BG J S2f Sn eS GS Ti Tis 713 6 BS Sap Sef J 6 Je T Sef 6 BS 113 ia Tig 719 BR BBS Saf BN Je HE 36 Sef Saf 6S BS Ti 11a T19 719 68 BS Sap S27 JG BE J T Saf eS BBS Ti 113 713 6 BS Sap SN Je 2G 255 GE b S62 S62 SA ee 550 530 S62 S62 fE AE 28 Sa 255 HE i 56 S62 500 500 Si S62 362 E AE 25 Zoe 52 1 O Se O eb L m 1 52 252 1 361 i Oa BOE zit He JE Jb Be We Az te Wz 34 Bi IE TG zH 2b zW DE JS JA Hi IE Wz E O 34 Bi JE DE zH 0o00 00 5 40 mi Walues in Lux Scale 1 39 Hot all calculated values could be displayed rid 32 8 32 Point Ex t Emn t Ema t Ta Emin Ema fa a z244 718 0 55 0 34 Fig 215 Output Value chart of the workplane Obstruction Of course the obstruction can be also taken into consideration in DIALux For this it is also necessary to define this in the CAD By the selection Edit daylight obstruction in the menu Edit or by right click on the room the obstruction can be inserted In the obstruction scene the room is shown in its exterior view Now objects can be planned arbitrarily
162. ested time to check and adjust their properties is lost ir net Sear cau Ale En ines peter u ohne edoira mu eae el fen mi Peis Baie ae Pir Tee Er geheerge Med Geren Engst eg pu ees ey Eph che Cag ete n eos Whe ett pal ewer Flaum Bai wenden niahi j a Eire d E Fegi eran J rete tirie Berets Fig 400 Possibility to change the linked DIALux room for an energy evaluation room Links between energy evaluation rooms and DIALux rooms can also be changed respectively canceled DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 242 DIALux Version 4 4 Ma l w k me meh Tih m de Gena three uro emjee wis eb a de Lee a were Anni C rojet 1 Ti verenden Lester EE Enero arriu ive i Se pene a Lire Rte es Beor Fig 401 Possibility to cancel the link of an energy evaluation room to a DIALux room Caution Each DIALux room can only be linked with one single energy evaluation room As soon as there is a link between a DIALux room and an energy evaluation room there can not be more Therefore there are only rooms in the selection list that are not linked to energy evaluation rooms And what is so different in energy evaluation rooms without a link to a DIALux room Because of lack of both geometric and lighting data informations DIALux can t do any automatic subdivisions into assessment zones for such energy evaluation rooms no statements concerning daylight are possible and
163. eview window of the furniture tree and dock it in various positions in DIALux You can move and copy furniture from one folder directory to another Also you can create new folder and you can delete existing ones All this is available by a right click on the furniture or on the folder Now DIALux saves the furniture as m3d files The benefit is that the preview pictures are saved also in that file That makes it much easier to share DIALux furniture with friends and colleagues Of course you can still save them as sat and jpg files DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 42 DIALux Version 4 4 The Colours Tree since version 4 3 formerly Texture Tree You can use the Colours tree to modify the properties of surfaces via drag and drop similar to inserting furniture into a room In the textures tree you find predetined textures surface pictures RAL colours and you have the option to organise your own textures You can move and copy textures from one folder directory to another Also you can create new folder and you can delete existing ones All this is available by a right click on the texture or the folder The subfolder Light colours and Colour filter will be explained in the chapter Light Colours General Raytracer Options Name Tiles brown o Rho 6 Size X 0 300 m v 0 300 m Preview 5 Lal Textures LE Exterior Lak DIALux 4 2 L Inside Lagi Floor i B L Concrete i
164. ew for Raytracing cccceeeeeeees 265 Staring POV Ray sacs tien einen arent NA 265 Manipulation of the POV file and editing in POV Ray seeded E E O ad cuneensee 267 Start of the adapted POV Ray Version 008 267 SIMOOMMING COGS sarepna rA 267 PICU eTa O cea tas a oE 268 CAIN Clie eip n E T soils 209 ANIMA UON sdnso I 212 Animation with Keyframes 0 ccccccecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeaes 272 TEAMS IATION QRINME LON ocatnseoseunenieenssaedusousceredadmnseusss 275 COOU area eens ee eee One e Tt OLE a teen cmnr mena ain em 277 Further functions Of POV Ray 278 VS On MOM OS st Gite cc cctutintadcnetee charts acter anieeua oranges 284 20 lt gt Cleaner en ae oto Pe Rete ae ioe arene ana oa eer Me E 294 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 8 DIALux Version 4 4 New functions in DIALux Version 4 4 The DIALux Version 4 4 has the following new features New features and increments The most significant change in DIALux 4 4 is the integration of the standards for the Energy performance of buildings Energy requirements for lighting Under the Kyoto protocol Europe is committed to reduce CO2 emissions seriously One instrument to achive this is the directive 2002 91 EC Energy Performance of Buildings Directive of the European Parliament and Council The directive s requirements hold for both new and to be renovated buildings and for both residential and non residential buildings Member states of the EU
165. ewers Soe besdenurernas 33 SA RIGMt MOUSE DUNOMA ee ete i aoa 34 35 3D CAD window context M NU cccccccceeeeeeeeeeee 34 36 Ground plan view context MANU ccceeeceeeeeeeeees 34 37 Context menu of a selected object ae 35 38 Project manager renenndani non rae tml 36 39 Plugln Tree Luminaire selection 37 AQ The User Database nacca a ER 38 41 Explorer context menu whilst DIALux 4 2 is running 39 42 Starting a lamp Plugin in DIALUX c cc cceeeeeeee eee 40 43 DIALux lamp demo database cccceceeceeeeeseeees 40 AA TNE FUMIUE U OC esnean NEN 42 AS TSC E a EO 43 AG OUA TaD r seativeisetusetat 44 AT DUT OUT UE pes oiei eae ENEE EEA 44 48 Save a 3D rendering as jpg Tile cece cece eee 45 ASTEGUNERA reer ee ee ee 45 50 Display guide WINKOW ccccceeccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 46 51 Property Page of the selected room in the Inspector 46 52 Luminaire arrangement and its luminaires in the project HOVE as 10 ol eee enone es ere ene anes eer ne re 47 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 284 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 53 Property Page Position of the selected l
166. f omni directional glare control DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 223 DIALux Version 4 4 Tabular Presentation of Photometric Data of Luminaires The light intensity and the luminance are also presented in tabular form The steps C levels and Gamma angles can be adjusted in the Property Page ee a be p ee ITW a Joross j panj j 9 Goes k Dh patiaa Mi pim E i j E fia oie a yE Lege es TE a a i EF ED EE Bo EE ET SE EE iF WE WE i O O gar 6 mma CF oi fa ca OP Aon oa r min pe Br Tes PEP eS MEF wA J ee L A ee Oe a NME e BF ff MA ho fe M A Pr AF fa lS BS ot a Fy BFR EE EH FE Li HE EE ee i Fihi mhin a A u A lle Foia Br th 2 eh w ee EAR EF In Em kO EF fe Pe EH Eme Fe T 7 araga iar or i Y ar Hi ge m LE Diir Pigia Eur EO i wa a i Lerta iye beiewt ime mr fil hi mE 6D F H i r ar 6 6 of fo di m bi LL Line Daia am BF a EO Em OW JO Em mE ee iss Ree GF Em Am Em AP jE Em Om a MER N bi aA ig Aro H pE UF ge Pm bN eiA a EF m tt Em om in Em EN Mg Bihi t POSE ae 6 im bm Am A im im si E oe Ss ht Te ER Fig 367 Light intensity table Tabular Presentation of Exterior Scenes DIALux can create a summary which contains a ground plan with luminaires and furniture and their coordinates With the Property Page you can adjust the scale details and coordinates TE O __ Sa bee eae ee i i errr a joross Cong IF
167. fines the rotation around the up axis Remember Y and Z are exchanged compared with DIALux Clock is a counter which is going upwards from O to 1 The definition of the clock has to be done in the Ini file of POV Ray To do this open the Ini file by clicking on the icon In this Ini file a section with the correct resolution anti aliasing and step width of the clock has to be added Example 320x240 Animation Name Width 320 resolution width Height 240 resolution height Antialias 0ff anti alias switched off Initial_Frame 1 Image to start with Final_Frame 25 Image to stop with defines the number of images Initial_Clock 0 0 start value of clock Final_Clock 1 0 stop value of clock After changing the Ini file POV Ray has to be closed and restarted After the restart of POV Ray this section can be selected in the top left area of the editor Initial_Frame and Final_Frame define the number of pictures to be rendered In our example there are 25 pictures Initial_Clock and Final_Clock should be taken without changing In Europe there are 25 frames per second in PAL format commonly A 10 seconds lasting film needs 250 pictures frames In our example we create 25 pictures coded as a PAL movie it will last 1 second In the POV file we have added the line rotate lt 0 clock 360 0 gt From Initial_clock 0 up to DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 274 DIALux Version 4 4 Initial_clock 1 the camera is turned around 360 POV
168. flux above the horizontal that is both used for lighting of vertical structures such as facades and is restricted to these structures will not be considered DS Fig 294 Luminous flux that is taken into account for the ULR value DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 184 DIALux Version 4 4 Obtrusive Light Luminous Intensity Calculation Point To minimize obtrusive light EN 12464 not only gives limitations for ULR values but also for luminous intensity values in obtrusive directions and light trespass into windows These limitations depend on the environmental zone category as well Limitations for light trespass into windows are given in lux Values can easily be calculated with calculation points and calculation surfaces To calculate luminous intensity values in obtrusive directions DIALux offers Luminous Intensity Calculation Points Such points can be placed just like any other calculation points They consider all luminous intensities of all light emitting surfaces of all placed luminaires So for a luminaire with two brackets two values are calculated DIALux uses the luminaire s LDC in the installed position the luminaire flux the dimming level and the corrections factor if applicable for calculation A Luminous Intensity Calculation Point can be placed for each potential obtrusive direction Luminous intensity calculation point Fig 295 Luminous intensity calculation point List entries List all lumina
169. following example shows a polygonal extrusion volume with a cone sticking in it The cone will create a depression in the volume To achieve that both objects are selected and the command Subtract furniture is executed Subtract furniture can be found in menu Edit or in the context menu that is displayed after right clicking the selected objects The command shows a Property Page in which you can select the one object all other objects are subtracted from Pressing button Subtract executes the command The CAD window afterwards displays what is left of the extrusion volume DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 82 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 117 Subtractions from a volume If the cone goes completely through the extrusion volume a hole is created If the newly created furniture is split all objects even those which have been subtracted are restored T i EM EE gt Se ine bE Fig 118 Resulting volume Selecting Single Surfaces Time and again it is necessary to work on single surfaces of an object With complex objects with very many surfaces it may take a lot of time to find the desired surface in the surface list of the object s Property Page To simplify this essentially you can select a single surface now graphically Just right click the object in the desired surface in the CAD and choose Select this surface from the context menu The desired surface is selected in
170. ft wall and the lower wall viewing lengthways and across the DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 177 DIALux Version 4 4 luminaire axis This saves doing the manual calculation with the help of the standard table 3 You can place UGR observers at workplaces to get UGR values with respect to a position and viewing direction b all used luminaires cC position and rotation of the luminaires d shadowing and reflection 4 With UGR calculation areas you get the distribution of the UGR values on an area The calculation is comparable to the calculation of UGR observers The output lists information about local glare problems on arbitrary places in the room The output of part 1 Is a table of the corresponding values For part 2 and part 3 you get single UGR values For part 4 you get isolines and greyscale diagram a chart and a table of the values Possible UGR values are between 10 and 30 Smaller values are shown as lt 10 Larger values are shown as gt 30 Insert UGR Calculation Point and UGR Calculation Area You can insert UGR calculation points and UGR calculation areas via Drag and Drop from the furniture tree into the CAD NOTE If you place these objects into the ground plan they are inserted at a default height of 1 2 m This is the standard value that is used for a sitting observer If you place them into the 3D view they are placed on the surface you touch with your mouse For example if you place them into the 3D view
171. ght sources this is even more important than with good values much depends on the scenery and the other settings lower values do not necessarily lead to better results error_bound 1 8 error_bound 0 4 error_bound 0 02 If there are artefacts it often helps to increase count it does affect quality in general and often helps in removing them the following three pictures use error bound 0 02 count 2 count 50 count 200 The next sequence shows the effect of nearest count the difference is not very strong but larger values always lead to better results maximum is 20 From now on all the pictures use error bound 0 2 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 279 DIALux Version 4 4 nearest_count 2 nearest_count 5 default nearest_count 10 The minimum reuse is a geometric value related to the size of the render in pixel and affects whether previous radiosity calculations are reused at a new point Lower values lead to more often and therefore more accurate calculations minimum_reuse 0 001 minimum_reuse 0 015 default minimum_reuse 0 1 In most cases it 1s not necessary to change the low error factor This factor reduces the error bound value during the final pretrace step pretrace end was lowered to 0 01 in these pictures the second line shows the difference to default Changing this value can sometimes help to remove persistent artefacts low_error_factor 0 01 low_error_factor 0 5 default low_error_factor 1 0
172. gs are available Thus you can select additional calculation options and operations DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 142 DIALux Version 4 4 Start Calculation Room 1 Light scene 1 Room 1 Light scene 2 Fig 218 Calculation dialogue DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 143 If you have a three button mouse the Move option is assigned to the mouse button in the middle If you have a wheel mouse you can Zoom by turning the wheel and Move by pressing it Various options are available when roaming through a scene DIALux Version 4 4 Working in the 3D View Setup the 3D View It is possible to roam through a planned scene to closely evaluate the results The observer s position can also be inside a room This is especially valuable when planning large rooms with a lot of furniture naa Fig 219 Evaluating a staircase from the upper storey The following tools from left can be used to change the position in the 3D view Fig 220 Toolbar for switching between modes e Select Objects when this mode is selected objects depending on the selection filter can be selected by clicking on them e Increase Decrease View Size to increase or decrease the zoom factor left click in the CAD window and move the mouse up or down With DIALux 4 2 you can increase or decrease the CAD view about 10 by using CTRL key or CTRL key e Rotate 3D View left click and move the mouse
173. gth or the width or both of a texture You can use it only for the texture placed on a surface not for the texture itself Delete Textures You can remove a texture from an object by using the Eraser from the texture tree on the corresponding object Thereby the object gets assigned again the origin colour Projektmanager gt Yorschau x General Raytracer Options Textures Use a Hame Eraser drag and drop action to pull l fi o00 an object into a Length 1000 CAD window Width f 000 mi Eraser E Textures Sgr Indoor cae oF Ceiling or Door or Floor oF Wall oF Window Flag Outdoor Leg Colours Fig 123 Delete textures Import Textures into the Texture Tree You can insert your own textures or images into the texture tree DIALux supports files in bmp dib jpg and gif tormat DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 86 DIALux Version 4 4 Textures can be inserted via Drag amp Drop into the texture tree To import a new texture into the texture tree open the texture tree and start the Windows Explorer Now you can drag the image file from the Windows Explorer into the wanted directory of the texture tree DIALux automatically converts the image file into the needed format The reflection factor is calculated using the RGB values The size defaults to 1m x 1m You should check these values and correct them if necessary With the menu File gt Import gt Texture Files you can use a dialog
174. gy evaluation room can be taken into account multiple times during the energy evaluation Mame und heecinebung Allgemein Ee prbrer iingeaun tne Verkndphueg by ore EAs PT Wefe iii fogs Djus Ba Flaw L We GPE ki dii Aimar eerie r Ara CELA Th wenwerdesd unha a emberig E fone 4 Ria fager m iteki Beech E fone 2 it ire Geer fuer ee J B Lindeekchteter beech Fig 390 Multi consideration of one energy evaluation room during the evaluation of the complete energy performance Projekt 1 S verwendete Leuchten G E Energiebewertung B j Zone 1 e i Raum 1 Energiebewertung jal Unbelichteter Bereich 1 i Zone 2 Elf Raum 2 Energiebewertung i Belichteter Bereich 1 jj Unbelichteter Bereich 1 wal Unbelichteter Bereich 2 a f Zone 3 Gl fe Raum 3 Energiebewertung 1 Belichteter Bereich 1 wal Unbelichteter Bereich 1 EE Unbelichteter Bereich 2 E A Raum 1 h Raum 2 ti Raum 3 project Fig 391 Multiple energy evaluation rooms and there utilisation zones Each energy evaluation room belongs to exactly one utilisation zone It Is initially created in its own utilisation zone but can be moved to any other utilisation zone DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 237 DIALux Version 4 4 Q Projekt 1 ah verwendete Leuchten B E Energiebewertung Fig 392 An energy evaluation room with a selection of utilisation zones to which it can be moved Utilisation zones are a main issue
175. he movement of the camera DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 276 DIALux Version 4 4 Camera rotation camera path Fig 444 Movement of the camera Colour POV Ray can calculate coloured light DIALux will export light colour information of a lightsource in version 3 2 Up to that time you can create coloured light either by using a transparent coloured filter glass in front of a luminaire or you can edit the RGB value of a luminaire in the POV file To add a filter glass in DIALux you have to place a small cube in front of the lightoutput of a luminaire In the Raytrace settings of the geometry you have to define the transparency and the colour of the filter It is necessary to remove these filters before calculating with DIALux DIALux does not yet calculate transparency To change the RGB value in the POV file you have to open the file and to find menu search gt find Idt_data The underscore is important light_source lt 0 0 0 gt color lt 1 1 1 gt Idt_data 72 72 1 LIGHTCORRECTIONVALUE color lt 1 1 1 gt means the RGB values for the light source are all 100 means white light If you change any of these parameters e g lt 1 0 1 gt the resulting color will be according to the RGB values This has to be done for each luminaire It could be helpful to use the replace function menu search gt replace DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 277 DIALux Version 4 4 Furt
176. he red axis likewise the blue and the green rotation points enable rotations around the blue and green axes respectively DIALux Version 4 4 pa Anzeigeraster Fangraster Farben auswahlen fur Anzeigeraster se Hifsinien C Lineal Hilfsebenen LS Automatische Hilfslinien Fig 241 Pick grid settings Colours of the Pick grids Scale or rotate An object is either in scale or in rotate mode After selecting an object it is initially in rotate mode To change between the two modes you can either open the context menu by doing a right click or and this is new you can hit the tabulator key to change between these modes Rotating Objects If objects are to be rotated they must be selected first Then they can be modified numerically in the Property Page or graphically in the CAD view Click on one of the three axes rotation points There is a pick grid for rotations as well Angle Pick Fig 242 Rotating objects Objects are rotated around their own coordinate origin This is indicated by the arrow cross and by the point of intersection of the three axes If multiple objects are DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 156 In the 3D View Pull rubber band lines Scale in one dimension Pull rubber band corners Scale in three dimensions DIALux Version 4 4 selected to be rotated together they are rotated around the centre of the encompassing cube Scaling Objects Objects can be scaled
177. he specific requirements for the illumination class are influenced by the kind of street user or the kind of street With the help of the following example we would like to explain to you the functionality of the wizard for the determination of the illuminance class of a street Illumination Class Wizard l Illumination Class Wizard x Welcome to the Illumination Class Wizard This wizard helps you in a step by step manner to define the photometric requirements important for planning street illumination At the end the illumination class is determined that effectively zeves as a summary of the photometric requirements The wizard ts based on the prCEN TR 13201 1 technical report from the European Committee for Standardisation To continue click Next Cancel DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 202 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 329 Illumination Class Wizard Welcome dialogue After activating the Next button you are called on to specify the typical speed of the main user Tllurmination Class Wizard Typical Speed Enter the typical speed of the main user type Fig 330 Illumination Class Wizard Typical Speed You can define the admitted main user in the street in the window Main Users and Other Users Confirm each of your steps by clicking on Next Illumination Class Wizard Main Users and Other Users Enter the main user type and the other permitted user types Fig 331 Illumination Class Wizar
178. her functions of POV Ray The following information is an excerpt from the POV Ray online help you get when you press F7 after POV Ray is started Furthermore you will find additional information under www povray org Here follows an abstract of the POV Ray help 4 2 3 Radiosity without conventional lighting You can also leave out all light sources and have pure radiosity lighting The situation then 1s similar to a cloudy day outside when the light comes from no specific direction but from the whole sky The following 2 pictures show what changes with the scene used in part 1 when the light source is removed default radiosity but recursion limit 1 and error bound 0 2 with light source without light source You can see that when the light source is removed the whole picture becomes very blue because the scene is illuminated by a blue sky while on a cloudy day the colour of the sky should be somewhere between gray and white The following pictures show the sample scene used in this part with different settings for recursion limit everything else default settings recursion_limit 1 recursion_limit 2 recursion_limit 3 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 278 DIALux Version 4 4 This looks much worse than in the first part because the default settings are mainly selected for use with conventional light sources The next three pictures show the effect of error bound recursion limit 1s here Without li
179. i a tee the im Se ee See ee i Fig 128 Insert individual luminaires If you click on Insert Single Luminaire in The Guide a corresponding Property Page opens in the nspector In the CAD the arrangement is highlighted by a rubber band lines in the Property Page initial values are displayed and at the bottom of the Property Page the Insert and Cancel buttons are located Depending on the currently activated tab you can adjust the Position the Rotation as well as the Mounting height of the arrangement In the Luminaire Property Page you can select the luminaire to be positioned Projektmanager _ Luminaire Mounting Luminaire DIAL 365 900 Leuchte DIAL 4 Stehleuchte DIAL 18 HALOSPOT EL F 50 Ww ELA DIAL 5 Autbaustrahler DIAL 1 SINDA Se OAL 3 BS 900 Leuchte Luminous emittance 1 Lamp TC L Sow Luminous Flux 2350 Im PR a 43 Power Correction Correction Fig 129 Luminaire selection dropdown list In the list displayed in the illustration you can find the luminaires that you have inserted into the project as well as the last luminaires you have used According to the DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 91 DIALux Version 4 4 Mounting tab you can make various settings for the mounting Projektmanager Luminaire Mounting Position seiz r00 m i800 m 4i2500 m 72 kk 30 x Suspension Mounting Height above Room Height2 800m Workplane Height 0 7
180. ia im 1 WE AF EE Aes oO De l ie n pim MM Fig 145 Scale a luminaire line If you pull the cross in the middle of the line with the mouse you change the position The angle and the length of the line remain constant With the blue end points you can modify the length and the angle at the same time It is not necessary to switch between scale mode and rotate mode Boom 1 Tiori a we mw ew h ha z FT m e m o ers a e Eijl Fl a F rs j sa nm ie i fig and dentata Depr ALEJ a Lite mij fA hi Onna arcu a idj bo lira roren i wii A ct rr i C care hI m 1500 fp he Fig 146 Edit a luminaire line If the luminaires within the arrangement have not been rotated the CO of the luminaires is directed towards the row axis from the start point in the direction of the end point DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 100 Alignment of lights on a track Alignment of luminaires within an arrangement JEJE Use this option to switch on the luminaire help rays and the CO arrows The help rays indicates Gamma 0 DIALux Version 4 4 Aligning Lights If you select individual luminaires in an arrangement via CAD you can also modify their rotation within the arrangement The position of the luminaires remains constant You may also use the function set illumination point Fig 147 Aligning individual luminaires within an
181. in DIN 18599 where they are used to collect energy evaluation rooms with the same utilisation conditions to provide them with a common utilisation profile Anyway utilisation zones are a good instrument to group energy evaluation rooms Caution Utilisation zones can not be created explicitely they are only generated during the creation of energy evaluation rooms O Projekt 1 Chey verwendete Leuchten S E Energiecbewertung Al Zone 1 S E Zone 2 a h Raum 2 Energiebewertung _ Belichteter Bereich 1 E Unbelichteter Bereich 1 i Unbelichteter Bereich 2 fi Fig 393 Energy evaluation room in project tree with its assessment zones Each energy evaluation room has one or more assessment zones Each assessment zone is either completely supplied with daylight or not Assessment zones can not be explicitely created removed or changed in any way They are exclusively created respectively adjusted to geometric and daylight depending conditions Each energy evaluation room is divided into assessment zones that do not intersect one another and that build up the complete area of the room These assessment zones can be displayed in 2D and 3D views of the associated DIALux room Daylight supplied and not daylight supplied zones are distinguished by colour Ea Pe Bo Fig 394 Display of assessment zones in CAD windows second icon from the left DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 238 DIALux Version 4 4 k Fig 3
182. in the DIALux software In the colour tree of DIALux you can see the subfolder Textures Colours Light colours and Colour filter While textures and colours are only for use with objects room surfaces furniture the light colours and colour filters are for use with luminaires The difference between light colour and colour filter is very important The light colour is the result of the spectral distribution of the luminous flux of the lamp In the folder light colour there are three subfolders with specific spectral distributions tor the black body radiator for standard DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 108 DIALux Version 4 4 spectra and for common lamps The common lamps are again divided into the incandescent lamps fluorescent lamps and high pressure discharge lamps E L Textures cl LS Colours z E Light colours Fe Colour temperature black body radiator Fc Colour temperature daylight Fe Standard tllurninants Fe Standard lamp spectrums i Incandescent lamps Fe Fluorescent lamps Fe High pressure lamps a Colour filter Fe Colour effect filter FE Colour correction filter Fe High temperature filter FE Film and stage lighting vb Used Textures Fig 162 Light colours in the DIALux colour tree These spectra can be used for a lighting calculation They can easily be dropped onto a luminaire If a spectrum Is selected the inspector shows information regarding the correlated colour temperature the spectral d
183. information about the designer the description and the name of the customer The button other folders opens a list of directories formerly used to store DIALux projects in DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 60 DIALux Version 4 4 Edit Rooms In order to generate a room click in The Guide on the Insert New Room button The Guide 1x Indoor Lighting Edit room Insert New Room Fig 76 Edit Rooms Generate a new room Edit Room Geometry Afterwards the ground plan view appears on the right side within the CAD window and the room coordinates are displayed in the nspector Generally the coordinate origin of the room is down left x 0 y 0 You can change the room geometry by moving the individual points via the mouse or you can insert points with the right mouse button Alternatively you can edit the room coordinates in the nspector DIALux transfers the values entered in the table after you have operated the tab key After finishing editing the C Fd Click right J mouse button i Continn with OK Pe Png os i ih Cit i Ep Sen mm LEE L Mim LE as Fig 77 Edit Rooms Insert room coordinates If you do not see all of your room you can zoom out from the view by using the Overall View of the Scene loupe button for the complete room view B DIALux 4 1 Room 1 Floor plan Fig 78 Edit Rooms Zoom to the overall view of the scene In order to see the 3D view you can use
184. ing area of the cube now Instead of moving to the left and to the right X Y axis you can now move up and down axis of the wall It can be any other surface as well tilted floor furniture The working area is reset when the left mouse button is released and another object is selected Moving and Rotating Objects without Pick Grid When you move the object via the mouse it only moves within the preset pick grid If you press the Shift key while you move the object the pick grid is deactivated The grid settings to be used when the pick is deactivated can also be preset Select CAD gt Pick Options gt Set Pick Grid DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 154 DIALux Version 4 4 Abstand x 1 000 m y 1 000 m Verschiebung x 0 000 m y 0 000 m Fig 238 Pick grid settings Display Grid ra 3 Anzeigeraster Fi Fangraster j Winkelfang Farben Fangraster aktiv Abstand x 0 100 mi Abstand y o 100 m Abstand z 0 100 m Kleinste Einheit bei deaktiviertem Fang 0 001 m Gleicher Abstand in alle Richtungen Fig 239 Pick grid settings Snap Grid eA Anzeigeraster i Fangraster a Winkelfang Farben Winkelfang aktiv Schrittweite 5 010 iz Fig 240 Pick grid settings Angle Pick DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 155 lt Tabulator gt fo NN Please note The red rotation point enables a rotation around t
185. ing data sheet 130 199 Emergency lighting Modify escape route 131 200 Emergency lighting Insert escape route lighting 131 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 287 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 201 Escape TOUTE ONIN serisine ninnan 132 202 Escape route lighting Visualisation 068 132 203 Open area JIQNting cccccccccccceeseececeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 133 204 Insert open area HIQNting cccceccccccceeeeeeeeeees 133 205 Properties of the open area luminaire arrangement ee ee tae RCT eee eee 134 206 Calculation dialogue Without furniture 135 207 Emergency luminaires in the CAD view 6 135 208 Emergency lighting Inspector eeeeeeeeeee 136 209 Emergency lighting data sheet 136 210 Specify dimming values of the control group 139 711 SCIECE THE 1OGa LOM sess dactmuesoessctanabesanorsegeseasseanetess 139 ZIZ INO KEAN ICI eit E 139 2 Eayn Tacto ecole assent nova aetacms atlenaaalaes 140 ZA Ar ay NONVE VACCOMNS estat eects taetelele staat ented teen Slee 140 215 Output Value chart of the workplane 141 21
186. inng ITET bwrw LEME 32 4 Oi gt Gamier Behauigebe 76 11 kiia Gteambenerpee Farita Towy 6 00 evn Geaamienerge Paramiidr Stand D kiris Greamtenerge Farssitde Laden da ligineeormtungy 6 00 Haaa Geaentachs 5 62 m hannah E pennies Lew dnr bee fen Pa En Loi l E genes Fig 413 Output for the complete energy evaluation project with all important characteristics DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 249 DIALux Version 4 4 Of course the user has the possibility to select which details are shown on each output page Detail F ifen on mahe Teler gebie auegebers Fig 414 Property page of the above output page The output of all involved parameters is most important because all energy performance standards demand such documentations Belichteter Bereich 1 Parameter if Enerpebewenung mech bieder Norm EM 15195 Lepehinges Project E mengieheveerung Lepehinge Lene Lee 1 cepehinger L nergithe ain Raum T OL iari FRATA Wer Beverangeleietung Air die Feleuchtung PA EF Leet a Rahm i see aar S a vi Leatueqaauhakhme rom Lades von Natevuentes ii D Betriabastoreien rur T agearg hi a7 50 Brinefaatunden Pur archereit pa O Betigtatel Fur suladed won Hetiuchisn fh free THibetebatkior Gir cine gereqebe konstante Beleuchtungestirke O90 Konstente Beleuchtungsatirbe regelbar Worhanden i art eee te ior Leh Telbeiiehatikior ur Berichsiehtaueg der Prigeeaz Seth a ee TP ee i E er Dat F
187. insert the CD Under normal conditions automatically a start window opens and you can follow the instructions If no start window opens please start the Windows Explorer and select the directory of the Plugin of the CD One double click on the Plugin opens it and you can follow the simple installation instructions About Online Catalogues DIALux offers the possibility to use online catalogues Online catalogues have the advantage that you can insert in each case the luminaires which you need Straight into the DIALux project without installing a complete Plugin on the PC Working with online catalogues is described fully on page 90 Lamp Plugins DIALux includes a lamp Plugin interface After selecting a luminaire from the luminaire catalogue you can select the correct lamp for this fitting Luminaire Plugins only offer standard equipment data for the luminaires The numerous variations of the same lamp type makes It absolutely necessary to select the exact lamp type which will be used in the installation Some of the luminaire Plugins directly offers the possibility to select the correct lamps from a lamp Plugin for the desired luminaire If DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 15 DIALux Version 4 4 this feature Is not yet integrated in the luminaire Plugin the lamp Plugin can be started directly from DIALux Lamp Plugins have to be installed by the user like the luminaire Plugins DIALux offers for both lamp and luminaire Plugins s
188. ires and their light emissions List only those luminaires and their light emissions with interference effects that exceed the following limit Value b Limit value 20000 cd Refresh View Fig 296 Property page for the outputs of the luminous intensity calculation point The luminous intensity calculation point output can be reduced to such luminaires and light emitting surfaces that do not hold a given limitation Street Valuation Fields in Exterior Scenes DIALux users often expressed their wish to use real situations for street lighting planning That is not possible DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 185 DIALux Version 4 4 in a design according to EN 13201 or the obsolete DIN 5044 The standard street does not encompass curves or the possibility of changing single luminaire technical values or positions So we added a new calculation surface for exterior scenes to DIALux which calculates the luminance distribution on a roadway for an observer the Street Valuation Field This calculation considers exactly all luminaires and other objects placed in the exterior scene Indirect light e g reflections trom facades is not considered shadowing through trees or buildings is Because of the strict definitions of street lighting standards the results of a Street Valuation Field should be used with extreme caution regarding the limitations of EN 13201 Whereas the standard street considers a
189. is directly accessed If you hold the mouse pointer on Indoor Lighting all options for planning a room will be available If The Guide is hidden you can access it with DIALux 4 2 the function Display guide window is in the menu Window Be E pe pE i ELE er I ee a r a ee Se E i ES d Fim ea ip ie Pi abi f bafi Fa heie d Sa joh e m T Emh LAE ae EISE EINE Ti ER Fig 50 Display guide window The Inspector With the nspector you can view the properties of each object selected either in the CAD view or in the Project manager Here you can also change the properties Some values have a grey background These cannot be modified here Project 1 gt Luminaires Used El amp Room 1 id Workplane ig Floor gl Ceiling B Wall surfaces wall 1 wall 2 BB wall3 ES wall4 Fig 51 Property Page of the selected room in the Inspector DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 46 Changes to individual walls or to the global setting for the entire room Changes to the luminaire or to the luminaire arrangement Here you can change the properties of the entire luminaire arrangement but not the properties of individual luminaires DIALux Version 4 4 In the previous example you can see several properties of the selected room Click on the Room Surfaces tab to change the reflectance properties globally Beware Here you can only change the reflectance of all walls together If you wish to change the reflectan
190. is is not selectable from the available list as well as the longitude and latitude in degrees time zone and summer time A deactivated checkbox summertime is equal to the wintertime You can save your inputs and remove any DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 58 Input data of location for the daylight calculation DIALux Version 4 4 4 4 G mo 12 4J 18 14 A Fig 72 Insert Project data Location Open a new project An already existing project can be reopened at DIALux start If you click in the start window on Open project Taiki T E o og p e ee ee sar i I i je feed fete w al eo i B k ii Ta em ahi mal oe B Be ii raan agili hahe eerram ia ine T Learg i bee rms Mre Fie Fia ia oni bem ma ii aan Fig 73 Open a project in the startup dialogue or in the menu File gt Open you can access the saved project by double click on it G ELALi 4 Sete Lon Project Opened Ext Fig 74 Open a project in the menu DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 59 DIALux Version 4 4 Project information in the file open dialog The file open dialog has changed in the latest version of DIALux While opening an existing project the user can see the most important information about the file E Lag Ori idr EA eee j a B reira iads Fig 75 Project preview The information given in this dialog about the project is the 3D view of the first room or exterior scene
191. is offering for simultaneous light planning and energy evaluation You would have to define and work on a lot of aspects that would be in place automatically for linked rooms So our recommendation is to work with linked energy evaluation and DIALux rooms as far as possible Working on parameters For each assessment zone you can have to adjust a lot of parameters influencing the energy demands of that assessment zone There are partly different parameters for the EN 15193 and the DIN 18599 When using the DIN 18599 there are some parameters taken from the so called utilisation profile of the superordinate utilisation zone That can t be done in EN 15193 since there is no such profile DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 244 DIALux Version 4 4 Betictuetunden Tag 243 h Naht A b Warbangiveert Ueeuchtungs t rk i soo fik H he der Nutrebene mao lm l mndeungsfaktor Merenth Sehaufgabe 0 84 Sbweserhensfaktor rt eR oe y 1 25 Teibetriebalaktar de Gebsudebetrievszet 9 70 Tipit Hutargsgenties standard nutsunpeorofle w sae i i Raum 1 Enengebewertung gel ibetchieter Rerah 1 by done 2 Fig 403 Utilisation profile of an utilisation zone in a planning according to DIN 18599 Furthermore there are some parameters only for daylight supplied assessment zones Jeten Preven Tagesicht numicu ae TF Tedberietafaiior fir che Tagesichtversonung 0 87 Tagesichitvercat guregalai 0 8 Fabii hir ee Magpa P
192. istribution and the colour rendering index Nerchau O Fluorescent tampa Cea ropaire oo E pgh 4 i Dh ee a Peirt Le g re ee Faer 16 pi i eee rte a LAD vandew ugh Teire ie Ue Coburn a Ligt rart Lai Doar en tari a E Febierpetiu ohi a Horm ight types i J G Shdird l ro isituma JEU ait jiii a Lighd cok Light coi Fe Pieko lacs Aaa T Aa ae el IEJ High pressure lamps Lesh emia ages are 44 i ah Colour ber wi Coma effect Aber Wil 4 Colour cartecher fitter ua beet lornae Abe LEJ Fim mi niay bing q l Tewhee L e EUEN ERE F Fig 163 Colour information for a selected spectrum Selecting a spectrum in the colour tree the inspector shows a graphical preview of the spectral distribution and a value for the correlating colour temperature This value is only exact for a thermal radiator The colour appearance of this spectrum is displayed as the background colour of the spectrum itself on the right hand side A click on the lower right corner of the diagram in the inspector shows a preview of the CIE test colour samples illuminated with the spectral radiation of this light source For each colour sample the colour rendering index is given and the Ra is also calculated DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 109 DIALux Version 4 4 SR Coix apprarance Pliareacent lamps Citar reede 2204 Lt Lit a itgi PLIPA p PEPA ARIE TAA Pere ppp E E e rae CAD dw Tha h ony frora v
193. istribution of light The original version can only handle ideal light sources like soot and ambient light Whenever the DIALux user wants to edit the POV Ray files it is important to use the pvengine exe in the DIALux directory e g C Program Files DIALux pvengine exe Otherwise the pov file can not be interpreted You can continue to work with POV Ray to edit the scene generated with DIALux All functions of POV Ray are available For further editing you must use the program ovengine exe that is stored in the directory C Programs Files DIALux You cannot use the original POV Ray software POV Ray Settings within DIALux The most important settings for the raytracing with POV Ray can be made in DIALux For the standard use of the photorealistic visualisation these settings are adequate Expert users can use all the features of POV Ray by loading the pov file made with DIALux into the editor of POV Ray Photo Realistic Images with Raytracing Raytracing means that the light beams from your own point of view with respect to mirroring transparency and roughness of surfaces are followed Basic Settings The newest version of the Raytracer POV Ray 3 6 Is integrated in DIALux This is substantially quicker and can choose the right brightness settings independently For the visualizations with POV Ray the spectral distributions of the lamps and the colour filter as well as the dimming level for the control gro
194. it is necessary and useful to reset the rotation of an object To achieve that you have to click the Reset rotation of origin button in the Origin Property Page of the Object The length width and height of the object are taken trom the rotated bounding box Name Geometry Surfaces Origin Define origin X 1 936 jm 2 090 m Z 0 500 m The position of the furniture origin can be modified without changing the position of the furniture itself This simplifies positioning the furniture Set origin to centre of the furniture a Reset rotation of origin i Fig 247 Resetting the rotation of the origin of an object or futniture Editing Object Surfaces In DIALux you can assign any colour reflectance material and calculating grid and textures to any surface To edit object surfaces select the object and click the Surfaces tab DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 159 To receive output on furniture surfaces check the Result Output checkbox DIALux Version 4 4 Fm rii jii FY Emri EE mi ER Fig 248 Editing surfaces In the Inspector the Property Page with a list of existing surfaces appears If you select a surface surface 19 in this case this is highlighted with a rubber band line in the CAD In the right hand side of the Property Page you can select a material a reflectance or a colour By clicking on the empty field behind the name of the surface in the li
195. l AE A A To add a spectrum to a luminaire just drag and drop it drag and drop onto it All luminaires within the arrangement field line circle or single get that spectrum To add a spectrum just to a single luminaire within the arrangement just DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 110 To add a light colour to just one luminaire in a scene DIALux Version 4 4 hold down the SHIFT key while dragging and dropping it The luminaires show the replacement of a spectrum with blinking for a short time and the light emitting surface will appear in the colour of the light source if available including the colour filter If you want to put a spectrum to all luminaires in the room or exterior scene just hold down the CTRL key while you drop it on any luminaire Luminaires with rotatable elements can get a spectrum and filter for each light emitting object individually If you just drag and drop a filter onto a luminaire with adjustable elements all the luminaires of the same arrangement and all light outputs will get the spectrum filter i dip ere Tees Fig 166 Drag and Drop of a spectrum onto a luminaire with rotatable elements The filter is not used on the luminaire of the same type which is in a single luminaire arrangement in the middle neither on the luminaire of a different type If you hold down the CTRL key while drag and drop the filter spectrum all luminaires and all light emitting elements get the spect
196. lamp or LED LDC for the emergency lighting Emergency lighting data sheet One element of good lighting design is of course complete lighting documentation In accordance with prEN 13032 3 DIALux also provides evaluation of emergency luminaires with regard to glare and optimal positioning in the form of a data sheet 5 SPB on aig pr re el alfi rk pE g fa biji ballad SS iz f P E E CEE j iia pazi Er onen i Pom eee Lp Ban hea abas rd ma pej Digby HiS d prsa een e es ae ee ee M 7 iS oa ee i Se a a re eons Data sheet emergency lighting FEH IN To NEULEET p mE fog 4 La oma E IR n im Lis Ti MUF wrist se brerenrat wind Us 1h ae La 5 pee t ee wel oa id memala toe wel igi red ed op me a JE mihe Fa paa bi fel ul i i er L E bgi heeds Ur Peg er 4 mga k E a an Gop ee ee eee et Sey i t s rei E il P I E TD A Fig 209 Emergency lighting data sheet DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 136 DIALux Version 4 4 Daylight calculation in DIALux DIALux is complemented by the extensive support of daylight calculations Now daylight scenes can be inserted in your project allowing the influence of daylight in the interior and exterior scenes to be simply calculated The different sky models clear overcast partially overcast as well as the direct sunlight influences the calculation Of course location time and alignment as well as the daylight obstruction are taken into consider
197. lanning calculations That Is because energy evaluation is very quick It needs a lot less time than the user reading and editing a selection dialogue As mentioned before the real energy evaluation is done at the level of assessment zones So when an evaluation is started the energy demands for each assessment zone is calculated Depending on the selected standard this may be only the total energy used for lighting or additionally the energy consumption used for illumination and the luminaire parasitic energy consumption In each case annual consumption values are calculated And that s it almost All other characteristics can be derived from these values Monthly values can be obtained with the help of redistribution factors values for energy evaluation rooms are nothing else than sums of values of their contained assessment zones values for utilisation zones nothing else than sums of values of their contained energy DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 247 DIALux Version 4 4 evaluation rooms and so on Even the Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator LENI from EN 15193 is nothing else than an area weighted value For assessment zones that are add to another assessment zone or to the superordinate utilisation zone things are different Such zones are not calculated independently hare ud iesire therechnen Lairig F C Bgenstandig berechnen DE Mi karri Bitch nahiga Bricker Gereh y J dur beeen beee ua sumchlagen
198. latent aatutaatdieslucstdeasiedesnteasiade 42 50 Gane S Uap a ee esa E es 93 grass SI eser TOA T 199 ground elementesinanodaru n a 50 180 181 height above working plane ssssiieessssrinieeessrrrreeeerrrnn 191 hemispherical illUMINaNnCe 00 0 cece ccc cc cece eeeeececeeeeseeeeeeeeenees 201 MONIZON Tal MIWUMIMANCE cc32sciccs ct icta a cine i sels cas 201 IE Srcat atari anette a aria anetueawaaaes 39 illuminance Conditions tesncendsrsccncnsadoesn de koadatedtaawatietadeticadtabe 192 INVUORAAI VATION GAS S 255 dia staysk cap A 190 illumination class WWI ZENO sts th cocaine ate inde cuie 190 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 294 DIALux Version 4 4 INCI ACL OMS PON eses dessa AE 94 image processing SOI Wal Caio Sessa io toe 147 WAS CET a OOM x aces nats aeaeuns ton cnuataaenite E agmatine 49 Mer COOMA ACCS cx tester des te helen tated teats dle ei iat 50 giet Glas 1a 2 lt ispeneneentte eereente ereceme antes On Onee ear meer g eae tem erate 204 DE threes Be dase OE 66 Li htdistibutioM CUNE snio ia A 93 Hont SCENE ee a a EN has 117 DS E EE E E EE EEEE EE E EE A EE 39 luminaire OUUSIGOsOT OON sanan eta steea ee nts ale 50 ETN AIC Cen TO eiee a er E 98 Luminaire SElEGtl Oleh iss oct eka eee 37 38 HUMAN GOO 255 55 ce ea ssesbesiaeseustalebates tances saunenstabetetssnandands 90 HONIG ANCE Ola OF AIM e riesaa andes hein ddenoes 223 MMO US IMENS NY acess katana letersi eiat ts 94 Obagi 1c ganar Pe nen rane oe mere eet a
199. lly correct because interior and exterior lighting design Is mainly made with white light sources Calculated values are totally correct as long as only direct light Is taken into account without reflection When reflected light has to be considered the mistake made in the calculation can be serious This depends on the spectral reflection of the material and the spectral distribution of the light sources Technical data of luminaires mainly describe the distribution of the light Well known examples are the DIALux internal ULD format CIBSE TM14 EULUMDAT IES and others The data describes the intensity of light from the light centre of the luminaire in defined directions Unfortunately there is no information about the spectral distribution of the light from the light source given Typically text informs the user which lamp is used e g T5 49W 830 The expert knows that this is a triohosphor fluorescent lamp with a correlated colour temperature of 3000K and a colour rendering index greater than 80 The colour of light is now more or less described but not for a correct calculation If light is to be calculated correctly including the colour information it is absolutely necessary to know the spectral distribution Fig 160 spectral light calculation In this diagram you can see the spectral distribution of the light source green and the spectral reflection factor of a
200. lso be manipulated subsequently As you can see in the DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 98 DIALux Version 4 4 illustration above the luminaires and the lamps used in the field can be modified without having to delete the field Projektmanager A Fa Fa _ EE R E Mounting height Rotations Luminaire Entire Field wfoo a yfoo f 2foo f Individual Luminaire goo E po z 30 0 ae Synchronized Individual Rotations Fig 143 Rotating the arrangement and the luminaires Both the rotation of the entire field as well as the rotation of the luminaires within the field can be moditied numerically or graphically To rotate a single luminaire within a field it must be selected individually Additionally there is the possibility to synchronize individual rotations Projektmanager Luminaire Positions Arrangement Rows 20 Luminaires per Flow 20 Start Point a o oo mo ri fo oo0 m End poit x E400 m v faeo m Erm 257 ls E AOU Fe Em total 257 ly Fig 144 Luminaire field position The position of a luminaire field can also be modified numerically or graphically Inserting Luminaire Lines Luminaire lines can also be positioned via the Wizard or manually After a line has been inserted the length the position or the angle can be graphically modified DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 99 DIALux Version 4 4 abx lafos 1 Foor plan ican 1 at wiew m ER FEl kaa
201. material red in the visible soectrum The reflected light from this surface would have the spectral distribution as shown by the orange line Up to now this effect was not taken into account by the calculation For the light source the radiation was constant over the visible soectrum The amount was defined by the luminous flux For the material also the reflection factor was taken as constant over the visible soectrum DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 107 DIALux Version 4 4 oo Fig 161 non spectral light calculation That this effect leads to serious errors calculating coloured light or coloured material is obvious DIALux can now take into account the spectra of light sources the spectra of colour filters and materials The luminous flux of the lamp is now distributed to the individual wavelengths according to the data given in the spectral distribution Because of this the results are more accurate and the visualisation is improved Now all colour effects can be displayed in the rendering Lamp spectrum Light colours Lamps can have a spectrum already defined in the luminaire Plugin or in the lamp Plugin In that case the user does not have to do any additional spectra selection to take colour into account in the light calculation The luminaire manufacturers will add spectral distribution information to their products soon Until that happens you can make use of the spectra included
202. me table or rough calculation methods to get such power values All lighting data is determined from the light planning and assigned to the energy evaluation And the advantages are not limited to the creation of energy evaluation rooms and their assessment zones A DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 241 DIALux Version 4 4 comprehensive update mechanism makes sure that changes to all relevant data of the light planning will be passed on to the energy evaluation as well So the energy evaluation is always up to date and a simultaneous planning is possible Nevertheless for a lot of details it makes sense to have them well designed before a link is created That s because DIALux tries to Initialise all of the parameters of the energy evaluation room and its assessment zones as good as possible so that the user has to do as little adjustments as possible And the better the starting position the better the initialisations Furthermore there is another important reason to do as much preliminary work as possible As said before there is an update mechanism between light planning and energy evaluation that reacts on subsequent changes This update mechanism not only changes properties of assessment zones it also may create new assessment zones and delete old ones The new zones are once again initialised as good as possible by DIALux but must again be checked and adjusted where applicable by the user The old zones are deleted the inv
203. n Jain m ni E mj ales Bi pE p Se fee ithe Ee ee JM ae gt J etdwaras gt pa ree fas Cl SBE A Bb alassafhews ceea AG PAs O O Eie l pi lems ga dd Serre m ada i d i i i E tried H i A a i a aa wl B s iih Di y ah w Immen m rer ee S emi Fa hmi ie earm Ea fats aram hE corn st LEEA Piit WRO Fig 180 Context menu of the room Insert a light scene If a control group was inserted already you can access it by a right click on the respective control group for the context menu and then add a new light scene In fig 163 the suitable control group already exists m e e pE he ieee p ee Ji ha Shim avee fo pies pi Era ES E amn N rere Ceen PA ig cee me eee it meen Pim sen seed i Eear Beets ems ial tne LEE Bime Fig 181 Context menu control group Add to light scene If you select the light scene in the Project manager the accompanying Property Pages open The same happens to the control group available in the light scene The Property Page light scene contains the name of the light scene which you can customise DIALux has the option to define light scenes as an emergency light scene and to include the first reflection on the ceiling in the calculation LG 12 You can make these adjustments in the checkboxes of the light scene Property Page DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 120 DIALux Version 4 4 Pra prknianaege yam ZE
204. naires Used Y Ox DIAL 1SINOVA fy Room 1 Fig 42 Starting a lamp Plugin in DIALux If there is not yet a lamp Plugin installed on this computer you are able to try out the DIALux Lamp Plugin If the luminaire manufacturer has entered technical data it will be used to pre select those lamps that fits into the luminaire The search criteria can be ILCOS L code power consumption socket voltage etc The lamp Plugin then offers those products that fits into the luminaire You can choose those lamps that are most suitable for the lighting layout This choice could be a Standard lamp or picking from special colours colour rendering index long maintenance lamps or other specific properties of the lamp The lamps include all technical data even light distribution curves for reflector lamps so you can decide whether to use a spot or a flood reflector If the change of the light distribution curve is not possible the luminaire can restrict the replacement of the original LDC MSL LEP eg DIALux DiALux Lampenkatalog het Lae ee Hit at bre dug i mura aioe L if ar E E Der Eichler ur fun dee Pear he Leer A ing boo anane aen eerie ier esl Hae Dag Sr ee er Py Le berT boat Dhara aoe eo ls egg Fell sce Sire beer fe eee ASD nee eon fen pe 8 Cech dew eles ayer ead bode ud Are anata Lic htnik gages prh rae Ra bea elrtiiet Geared at Cepeiaih sebei n hain Loge merh hrp ey ree ae Pi a aT LDI
205. naires are equipped with battery packs or they are connected to a central battery So in the emergency case the regular light distribution curve is used for the calculation Maybe the luminous flux is different In DIALux a single luminaire can be picked and the settings to use it in the emergency lighting calculation can be defined DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 135 DIALux Version 4 4 BOM ces ee Le ee fl o F eee b pe wee Ce one ews pee Got ae O we Ee EE ae 9 Peden Eo Blt FleGSh ew Bei Pieec cone Aal Praprii manager i peyan Ham Lahim 3D shew bfe i Liher oraval one a Seargnon jee ema E oy 7 E F in am E Ce Lun weterce Lures miraa F bet oe ba nee hgh he T h tr leag Lag wag Ti ith te emt ai Eiir r becker Bi inrigrticy Lienert Li E gH ere Fig 208 Emergency lighting Inspector You can define here if the luminaire has to be used for the emergency calculation Also you can define if it is used only in the emergency case or for the normal lighting The luminous flux for the duration time can be edited here The emergency LEO is designed to handle a light distribution curve which is different from the regular LDC There are for example fluorescent lamp luminaires on the market which have an incandescent lamp or a LED included for emergency lighting In these cases it would be possible to use the fluorescent lamps LDC for the normal lighting situation and the incandescent
206. nal dialogue 207 340 Insert street arrangement via The Guide 208 341 Insert street arrangement Via MENU cccee eee 208 342 Insert street arrangement via right mouse button 209 343 Insert Street Arrangement Luminaire 209 344 Insert Street Arrangement Boom properties and pole arrangement 223 zeveeni ieee ee e ae 210 345 Insert Street Arrangement Select the arrangement TGs Zanataa E E E ae 211 346 Insert Street Arrangement Optimisation Valuation FFU o EAE E A POOE AT A EEE 211 347 Insert Street Arrangement Optimise 0 212 348 Street arrangement Optimise arrangement 213 349 Calculation field in the ground plan view 213 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 290 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 350 3D visualisation of the street vecccrcesvecvencevravenderveens 214 351 2D visualisation of the street cic ceei neat 214 352 Insert street into exterior Scene 215 353 Street in an exterior Scene cccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneaes 215 354 DIN 5044 for the road lighting calculation 216 SSOP SaN S eoa a E A 217 356 Output header IMeiiisciasidaiieas in dndeeetinaeo
207. nance as well as the maintained illuminance Is indicated Additionally the initial and maintained value for the whole room is likewise indicated The user can see immediately the contribution from this luminaire arrangement compared with the DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 64 DIALux Version 4 4 whole layout of luminaires In this case the values are different because other luminaires are in the room In the outputs the maintenance factor is shown as before on different output pages For example like here on the page Maintenance plan The classical method is the default method when a new room is added Ts L ALUX irohlime Upin ELTIZEL F kal Room 1 Maintenance plan Regular maintenange is essential for an herte lighting installation I is tie only way to limi the light ipss over fhe inttadation s We lime The reinireern valoes ef tha illuminance apactiod ihe EN 12464 are maimanancs values Le dhay are hacad Gd new yale 21 ndallabon ma mairean bo be pr eetribed The same amp of darge hud abso for the values Calculated in Olax They can theredore be reached only if this basic maintenance plan is diligently canned girl General room infermaltbon Environment conditions of mym Normal blant nance mb erval of room Anria Line Arranqenbent DAL 7 BS S004 ewehie Effect at reflechnd roar tuac amall k 1 6 Flux distribution Caract Manbenance mberval of luminared Avirunaly Lamm arg Hpt Giod IPS fa
208. nce in C Program Files DIALux Raytracer Room 1 omp e Additional preferences are possible You can display outer walls of rooms transparently or daylight obstruction by using the checkboxes Image preferences This defines the size of the picture in pixel Any size can be selected The aspect ratio is 4 3 This ratio is correct for projectors most monitors and TV screens Modern TVs and laptops can have ratios of 16 9 or 16 10 To define such a ratio see advanced settings For a first picture you should always start with a small picture like 640 x 480 zj Bahri iibl Figim jirim Quack peisea lig geet Pine dmana m Piel E oe aa ok ca Fig 425 POV Ray Image preferences Indirect calculation In addition to the settings of indirect calculation of the quick preferences in this dialog the indirect calculation can be defined in a more detailed way DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 261 DIALux Version 4 4 Behe mage with Pie Bay i Z Dia pene l Image nreieences barai cabculahor Bighi prolenireee Laghi pephetarsies A uie adot ema baung Li ieme Al WED relie ri B Hi g reihi f ma phoi miio vaie Can lasd bo the acer baig intomeciiy Hri or Fani merine at l ou Can And tut the amati igrdicence of the piaia n a POY Flap irira Histo Fig 426 POV Ray Indirect calculation The checkbox Use Radiosity switches the indirect calculation on and off Count The int
209. nscheid page 151 DIALux Version 4 4 Wireframe Model With DIALux there is the option to change into the wireframe mode This is so that you can work on an older computer without judder when moving in the 3D view You can find the function in the menu View gt Wireframe Display It is quicker to use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl W el i ae p ae 7 i mn IOE l eo Jaor sari bas LEERTE jboss Hi Ess AEE EE S es ee ih L Fig 235 Changing into the wireframe mode DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 152 To change the height of an object via the mouse keep the Ctrl button pressed DIALux Version 4 4 Editing Inserted Objects Moving Objects After luminaires and furniture have been placed inside the room they can be edited as desired The nspector displays all information relevant to the object which was selected in the Project manager or CAD view This object can be moditied by entering new values If an object is modified in the CAD view rotated moved or scaled the values in the nspector are updated booms Moor pia iRoom 7 View hx Saris gh Fig 236 Graphically modifying the object height To modity the position of a body along the Z axis press the control Ctrl key Keep the button pressed while you click on the arrow cross within the body As long as the left mouse button and the Ctrl key are pressed only the height of the object can be modified When you release th
210. ntrol in the desired position click on the Apply button so that the currently displayed window can be retreshed in your 3D Rendering DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 125 Light scenes can be optimized together Export light scenes in dic format DIALux Version 4 4 Projektmanager ye Brightness Extended Settings Brightness Control for 30 Rendering Apply Here You can set the brightness of the 30 display of the rendered rooms The modification applies to all subsequent 30 renderings Click on Apply to refresh the currently displayed window Fig 192 Brightness control for 3D rendering In the Extended Settings tab you can correct the exposure time of the CAD Additionally you have the option to optimize light scenes together by means of the checkboxes Projektmanager _ Brightness Extended Settings M Use Automatic If Optimize light scenes together Exterior Interior Daylight Apply Here you can corect the exposure Fig 193 Extended settings Export of light scenes Now DIALux offers the option to export light scenes in the dlc format DIALux Light Control You find this function in the menu File gt Export gt Save DIALux light scene file ai a a ad a _ z i Pal op Le ES SS ae es ES Ee 7 F Ejn PROM d oe E p i aj 2 ey E N hee CHOEkS taf Jea r ml ial ia tees ee ee i eee ee a ad ee fete 1 E f a i ya a a
211. nts Naturally you can also combine these As soon as a room element overlaps another the invisible part is no longer considered in the calculation Square column Round column Sloped ceiling Ramp Flat ceiling Platform Fig 104 Edit rooms DIALux room elements The room elements vaults are new in DIALux 4 Further possibilities for the construction of complicated ceiling forms have been improved Now it is also possible to copy vault ceilings Cross vault Half vault Fig 105 DIALux room elements Vault The well known and well tried room elements of DIALux are complemented with new objects dome and half dome These elements can be scaled or rotated just like any other room elements They combine with the room Their surfaces are automatically recognized as ceilings so that ceiling mounted luminaires snap automatically to dome or half dome surfaces Dome Half dome Fig 106 DIALux room elements Dome and half dome DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 76 DIALux Version 4 4 Insert via Property Page You can also insert objects numerically by entering coordinates in the furniture Property Page within the Inspector Select the object in the furniture tree enter the desired position in the nspector and click on nsert JB DIALu amp 4 1 Room 1 Floor plan L pe Ei View CAD Paste Luminaire Selection Qutput Window 2 Ogha aA s BwehLoOm s Projektmanager a Room elements Use a Sag andcoo
212. nverged to the edges That makes the video smoother and there is no judder effect DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 255 DIALux Version 4 4 Save video Video properties Size of video Images per second Filmlength Quality Camera motion Number of points Range Speed Preview Hi Fig 421 Settings of the video 320 x 240 pixel 25 PAL v 30 seconds Anti aliasing 5 40 0 18 mjs Create video i Besides the camera path and the camera viewing direction also the video size the number of frames per second and the duration can be defined The size defines the number of pixels in the X and Y direction on the screen The higher the resolution the more space is required to save the video If you want to prepare a presentation for a TV DVD or S VCD you should select a standard resolution In Europe the PAL format is common in the US the NTSC format is used normally Also the frame rate is defined in the standard format The camera speed is defined by the film length the frame rate and the length of the camera path The speed along the camera path is constant If anti aliasing is selected the quality of the video will be better but this function needs also some calculation time In the field camera motion you can see a summary of the camera path and speed Moving the slider Preview brings the 3D CAD view into the position of the camera along the path So you can check the resulting video b
213. o an emergency lighting scheme Because the emergency situation and lighting is often integrated into a regular lighting design and realised with luminaires which are in use also for the regular lighting this reduces the work the designer has to do You are able to select those luminaires which are used for emergency lighting from all the luminaires placed in a room and you can also place additional luminaires which are only used in an emergency Such luminaires which are only used in the emergency case are not taken into account in the regular lighting calculation But these luminaires are placed and they are listed for the outputs to locate them for the commissioning You can select for each luminaire whether it is used in the regular lighting in the DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 128 DIALux Version 4 4 emergency lighting only or for both cases The duration time and the luminous flux can be set for the emergency case The dimming of luminaires and taking daylight into account in an emergency lighting scheme is of course not possible To create an emergency lighting scheme you just have to select the desired room and make a right click to add a lighting scheme a nmm mj alll A ick tei j i r p p r i EEPE 7 a E i E A zj al i S Pn 5 al meer eee ee a ae De L a a ete i eres oe ee eg meee Tna mrg ba m ssh ii mea mm a ae Fig 196 Emergency lighting scene If you want
214. oints in the CAD window The end points of the tape measure will snap to grids help lines insertion points of objects and to the bounding box of objects If the snap is not to that point you like it to be just zoom into the scene and the snap will be more accurate i Soe oe ee eee ee pe E FEFFE j HAHH i Ga fest ef a sea ee ee eee Oe re ee EE ee oe a big BE oli a ma ete ee rs i Cr inn g Q Tia Fm ele prm Ter ba l am Se eee EFN ie is EE Fig 252 The tape measure function in the ground plan view In the 3D view there are even more distances visible There you can see the direct distance between two points as well as their heights above the floor and the distance on floor level Ej p ew se E j E PEFFE a j FLIN EI F I J ras aaa ati eal oo jiajavaa ee wns i er LC ss ge eee so f had ol RP U p jhi Lh j Le F hin y p tamm e Pen h a Bei ot bel oe Ti bees Oo bhe o ery 3 ay be E o Iaio imini Lj ia i mm 7s Fi le re i ie Tam htl ame h oe Fig 253 The tape measure function in the 3D view DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 162 To switch of the snap temporarily just hold down the SHIFT key while you move the object DIALux Version 4 4 Working with the snap grid The snap grid is a tool to simplify the handling and the movement of any object in the CAD views The objects will step in the distance that s defined in the snap grid
215. ome demonstration data in the user database and in the DIALux Demo Lampdatabase DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 16 DIALux Version 4 4 DIALux directories Background information Microsoft has more and more strictly separated the user and the administrator privileges in Windows Vista and XP So misuse of the computer by unauthorized persons or by malware was complicated On the other hand users administrators and manufacturer of software are more and more forced to follow the guidelines of the operating system strictly To make sure that also users with restricted privileges can use DIALux with all it s features it was necessary to change some directories used by DIALux Furniture textures my database These directories are now placed in the application data common folder This standard directory can be changed by the administrator The following examples are standard settings after a windows Installation Windows XP Windows 2000 C dokuments and settings All Users application data DIALux e Drive is the system drive standard C e subdirectory documents and settings is localized Standard Documents and Settings e subdirectory application data is localised and hidden Standard Application Data Windows Vista C ProgramData DIALux e driveis the systemdrive standard C e subdirectory ProgrammData is hidden Projects and raytracing files Since DIALux 4 4 the dialux project files and
216. on class wizard can be started To understand this see also the section umination class Wizard DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 190 DIALux Version 4 4 You can also select single valuation fields and illumination classes for each element A Maa bane ai cer er ar OP Pe PAR eT OES TW a AY Ueto cgi ca Hl fl emt i pm bernid Om krri jaanta Aerar a ia Coe Fit dmh lma rir l taim e Ai Oo El i m E Smee pae SOI _ 2 mts fay iaj x E umne r 7 Jum P I iets se D Reine ar j n e se ih F sale fs lll aor ae EF lal a j e el a ie j Fig 308 Valuation Fields and Illumination Classes In the window Luminaire arrangement you can select a luminaire and place this in an arrangement You can optimise the arrangement parameters depending on the predefined photometric requirements The illumination class and situation give the parameters to be optimized Now you can decide which of the arrangement variables should be optimized These are e g pole distance height above working plane slope Several variables can be also optimized at the same time Ler jeh ee E Lena aurer ed reed pop ee eee he ee a A a Po eee ee ee ee fi at i S kts af callie T Ba AT Bami mg bei pa E eos ag Hera jie banm ee faa z m eee eee lT E mee paan Eisis Pii bs pau fe Fieis ime a dren a rl ta fa aaa anon Feat eto aN beiee Tema Hirm Cee EY hiji dmr
217. orking with help INOS Ss sdicdewccesaecdaxtiadriancreeanecd eens 165 SII ClO WAC Scene e tater sagas A 166 POI MEMS SOS ree 167 SOMOS NEIDE deiina 167 Circular help IMC tics Aetna tiettate ase tnontdences ciseabadeevads 168 HeD grd cit esha cork siucuietirectha haan T Gack 170 Copy and paste with CTRL C CTRL V and CTRL H E IET EE EE Nee aah tata ea eta E 171 Copy Along a LING sssini rae aaeh 172 Align and distribute sssnneessniessinesrrrresrrrreerrnn 172 Centre objects INte TOON einan 173 Editing CAC ULL OM sensira era i 174 Calculation SUNT ICES a aa N 174 Calculation surfaces for different types of illuminance E E E E E A A EE 175 Pencitraan an eE T 175 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 6 DIALux Version 4 4 ASRS NS E Sorse re Satara te a dveotees eas eae 176 Calculation PON Srno atid atest ee tat ees 176 GR Cal CUA O sieniin i a 177 Insert UGR Calculation Point and UGR Calculation ATO ia aE an ns Suc acacia aan Cele cites 178 Adjust Viewing Direction of UGR Observer and UGR TaN Sic ee ne ee gene Ser ne Ee Sea er 179 EXO LIONN Oresteia 180 Exterior SCONES ioei a a E 180 Ground Flener eecalaietcetdiuencees 181 Floodlight Illumination sce iacia dcmcununniarnndtvenaxtanvets 182 Lighting Design according to prEN12464 Part 2 ENG 90 E EA E 183 ER a a E E E 183 Obtrusive Light ULR Calculation 0 cee 184 Obtrusive Light Luminous Intensity Calculation Point Sad EAT AN T ET EE O A EE aioe 185 Street Valuation
218. ormance for buildings directive causes increased efforts for light planners Besides the well known lighting data characteristics they will also have to pay attention to new energy performance characteristics Fortunately a common light planning already contains a great deal of the needed information for an energy evaluation These informations can be analysed and recycled for the energy evaluation So if the energy evaluation is integrated into the light planning process as efficient as possible the additional expenses for this evaluation can be reduced significantly That s why DIALux 4 4 offers the possibility to include an energy evaluation according to EN 15193 or DIN 18599 A DIALux user can include an energy evaluation project into a DIALux project with only two mouse clicks DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 234 DIALux Version 4 4 ef eae Aah Het Foe F z a Tr Keven Raum einlig al scuichemidchit rs Le Hirur AgLenzene P i bbi z E pe Neue Glandardotrade enigen Tal akel PLETE eT De Fennie uel Tren abatiem Benecheungstaichen feetranecunkic ae Srey Tessie Fig 386 Insertion of an energy evaluation project into a DIALux project via menu Paste and via the context menu of the DIALux project The rooms for light planning can be transfered to the energy evaluation all together or only in part Caution Energy evaluation is only defined for inner rooms Outdoor
219. other calculation point There are some special properties an DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 183 DIALux Version 4 4 inclination angle viewing angles from a start to an end angle and a step width The inclination angle defines the observer s viewing direction towards the horizontal Start and end angle define the observer s vertical viewing section Here 0 is the direction along the positive X axis positive angles move counter clockwise Step width defines the different viewing directions between start and end angle GR observers can easily be placed as a line or even as a field by using the function Copy along a line Obtrusive Light ULR Calculation The ULR Upward Light Ratio value is the percentage of luminaire flux of a luminaire or a lighting installation that is emitted above the horizontal where all luminaires are considered in their real position in the installation Sky glow limitations depend on the environmental zone of the lighting installation The standard defines four environmental zone categories from E to E E category is used for intrinsically dark landscapes like national parks or areas of outstanding natural beauty E category is used for high district brightness areas like city centres Sky glow limitations reach trom 0 to 25 DIALux states the ULR value on the Planning data output page for exterior scenes DIALux considers only luminaire flux that goes directly into the sky Luminaire
220. ou use the middle mouse button the scroll icon appears and you can navigate by moving the mouse You can use the print preview to view the printout on the monitor before it is printed DIALux supports DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 219 DIALux Version 4 4 WYSIWYG What you see is what you get To go to the print preview use the File gt Print Preview option Please keep in mind that only the output types that were selected with a black checkmark are included in the print preview and in the printout Depending on the size of the report generating the output can take some time An information window displays the current status x Benerate lzolines L Cancel Fig 359 Print preview generation status The print preview supplies you with an overview of the chosen output Se eee ee Ce i i Fi g y i i Tai d i E 3 p i ar La E i Fig 360 Print preview Here you can also specify further print settings depending on your printer For larger print jobs it is advised that you send multiple print jobs consecutively e g Page 1 30 Page 31 55 If the RAM is quite large gt 128 MB this is not required Limit Result Output In the Project manager you can limit the amount of the output For example with sloped ceilings there may be results for a number of surfaces that you are not interested in For all these surfaces you can disable the checkbox Resu t Output so that they will not appear
221. pens bitmaps BMP or JPG s DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 55 DIALux Version 4 4 DIALux 4 1 X Standard Values Global CAD Window Output Contact Isoline pt Output for working levels Isoline Yalues Font Size 10 0 pt I Draw Luminaires Value Chart Font Size 10 0 pt Ih Draw Furniture Scale of graphics f Maximum size Optimal standard scale Logo C Almaget bmp ie Footer Bureau Header Tl Display file path Display file name Project details Names for edit fields 1 Klaus Mueller 3 Light amp Light 5 fo 2 uftragsnr 4 Kunden Attention Changes do not affect existing outputs The entries only applies to new output Fig 66 General Options Output In the last tab Contact you can register your name and address Here the address of the company doing the layout planning is entered It appears in the output header These entries are used in the Property Page of the project Information about the operator is entered here too This is then transferred in each new project omme SS Starend Vaksa Binha CAD Window Quip Contact Contact flea fino ebia Pike Puce arrest Company Futa Light arel Design Find rovernas 68 Ack ens Lik 12M Sang Tos urate Krii himin The modicahon ony affect new orects Old and cuneth opened peoecta me not alfected Fig 67 General Options Contact If the Customise function is selected which you can access via menu File gt Se
222. que situation and how the scene is meant to look Here is a higher quality rendering of this particular scene but the requirements can be considerably different in other situations Global settings 4 radiosity Prelrace Start 0 00 Pretrace end oo count 500 nearest count 10 error bound 0 02 recursion limit 1 Low error factor 0 2 gray threshold 0 0 minimum reuse 0 015 brightness 1 ade bailouc 0 0172 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 282 DIALux Version 4 4 higher quality DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 283 DIALux Version 4 4 List of figures Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig t DIALIX SOLU Dts citron N 12 2 Selection of the components to be installed 13 3 DIALUX CD BrOW SEN enigeen AA E 13 ATM YAY I care eT Y TEN Usea E O 14 5 DIALux Light Wizard DIALux Light icon 19 6 DIALux Light Wizard Start ccccccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 19 7 DIALux Light Wizard Project information 20 8 DIALux Light Wizard Data Input eee 20 9 DIALux Light Wizard Launch a PlugIn 21 10 DIALux Light Wizard User Database 0000 21 11
223. r it is displayed in the CAD window DIALux differentiates between print output and monitor output The monitor output enables experts to easily evaluate only the required information without being limited by layout and page size Big tables are displayed completely and can be viewed by scrolling Here it is handy to use the middle mouse button Oi Table 0 dbx nashi Em E TA ma aay wr dif aig Fi LY dEr 0 328 5 x5 er a zay 37 41E 41a a5 50 457 Oar J32 Jiz mm mm NE Nr oc FIJ a2 2 E a O Hth TI CF ee e af ar Tr Tr 21 a1 F ie 0 759 Jid Jid TE 5 wi Gl 40 Td 7 r di2 0 703 314 314 335 335 Si 351 a0 a0 37 347 412 Obey eral ara war mall ail atl aati Jan Ei Emi E 0 591 Jra ig Fanfa a SIN St Fh TAi Ful Fill T 0 534 25 2 zat eri wS DS ais ETT EE IE 7E z D478 2345 2345 247 Eri w5 J55 155 wa 155 Ez Ees Z E FE lie 1E IFE Wa 1E fe fer IJ Aa nic An Z Oi limi Temi re Wa 1A bE 11 IUE ALI A Fo 0 309 132 132 134 14 ise 1a 140 1 40 154 144 156 0 253 T32 ai 134 isd is 138 140 10 15d 15d 155 i IRH F 1 i I F lif lit 141 141 142 1 0 1 125 i 17 12 I2 FE WaT 137 1d 141 LE F 1 1 1 ih ps da pon En p 0 004 Ww Ue Te te We e M WW 131 131 131 Doza ji 1i 1b iii Hi Hi Ti iir T3 131 131 m DIM Dr MZT Se Se AKA OS Oa OO DA IEE IS Allenton The coondinabes refer bo the image above Values in Low Greil bd x Gel Pots Fig 358 Monitor output of a big table Scroll bars are located at the window edges If y
224. ragsnr 4 Kunden Attention Changes do not affect existing outputs The entries only applies to new output Fig 355 Output settings The logo and your user data are shown together on all pages after the cover page Foeti oo 4 6 ERBA gh i E Ughi Operke klaus Mueller Telephone 51 106 0 Sreeli Fax 72981 106 2511 Lued ensce d e Mail mueller ig hlde DIAL 1 SiNOYA Luminaire Data Sheet Luminous emittance 1 ar Fig 356 Output header line DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 217 DIALux Version 4 4 Global Settings The Property Page Global is used to specify whether you want to use European or American units in your projects Metric SI m cm ete European SI l4 ode etc 7 Fig 357 Global settings DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 218 DIALux Version 4 4 Output Viewing Calculation Results After a calculation has been completed DIALux shows the 3D display of the room Project output can be viewed before or after a calculation The output types which are not affected by the calculation results can be viewed at any time for example the project cover sheet luminaire parts lists luminaire coordinates room coordinates etc Most output types need to be calculated first If one of these output types is opened when there are no results yet DIALux enquires whether the calculation should be performed When you double click on the desired page in the Project manage
225. rangement DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 149 Close views via the X icon Saving of various CAD views camera mode DIALux Version 4 4 Click on the X icon in the upper right corner to close the window Se a ee el db T a fees i eo Jadarguary fad 3 2 PELIIN aes sea eee conan Aaj a inh ae 7 a mwe jimi Be wm a ae _ L Fig 231 Closing CAD windows Save 3D CAD views In the 3D view it is possible with versions from DIALux 4 0 onwards to save camera perspectives of 3D CAD displays with certain key combinations Turn and zoom the CAD into the required position and then press CTRL number This view will be saved in the project The view can be set again automatically by pressing A t number The numbers 1 to 10 can be allocated as wished You can also do this with a right click in the CAD or under the menu CAD he fe ieee le eee i w EEP ETS ETTE i E N Paar sacl MeNe EMG Bb able CETE TE 44 r pezen le H Fig 232 Save camera view via context menu DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 150 DIALux Version 4 4 Hocanl rt gt gt ae Fig 233 Save camera view via menu The function redo camera view accesses the saved views You can proceed via the context menu within the CAD view or in the menu gt CAD iw oP Bar er he d Fig 234 Redo camera view Redo positions DIAL GmbH L de
226. re ibe 2 00 1 50 1 00 0 50 0 00 Fig 273 Snap points on the help Of course it is possible to place grids in other grids This is useful if a luminare arrangement should be placed within one ceiling element Copy and paste with CTRL C CTRL V and CTRL H With CTRL C objects can be copied into the clipboard This can be single objects or combined objects even those ones of different types With CTRL V the copied objects will be placed next to the original objects in a distance of 1m in X and 1m in Y direction With the keyboard shortcut CTRL H the object in the clipboard will be pasted next to the position of the mouse taking into snap of any snap grid nearby To copy luminaires into a ceiling grid just place the first fixture Than move the mouse to the ceiling panels you need a luminaire in and press the CTRL H keys The luminaire is pasted and if the mouse was close enough the grid snap takes the luminaire in the correct position DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 171 DIALux Version 4 4 Copy Along a Line DIALux offers the possibility to copy an object repeatedly one behind the other This function Copy Along a Line is selected in the CAD window using the right mouse button or the menu Edit ee Wies Dis abel Lj ferme Dm See Fig 274 Copy along a line with the mouse In the nspector as an alternative or supplement to using the mouse you can edit the number of copies align the line the distance an
227. ria area Kaaa Ta Pte ril 32 m D Projekt 1 S verwendete Leuhin Fig 404 One property page of a daylight supplied assessment zone Some only for special daylight sources meper forse aaen a e aipiga der Taidan fir bekti patted marea Genng 4 20 gt 67 Tehi Perg mach ome 2 4 Tipihau nach ra La A Efiki Lidttrarscessaacagrinef 0 77 Wieringemert 399 be Wartingewert 300 Dreeneungalys Honcon tal aa FLaumgeone be _ rachergead 9 23 aun Standart des Pregaietay hequngetvos ms Raumgecees trie Fig 405 Property pages for assessment zones that are daylight supplied by windows respectively roof lights Assessment zones of unlinked energy evaluation rooms have additional parameters since direct input of energy consumption is possible DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 245 DIALux Version 4 4 heme und etree leede Dmp bihise Er cart lki ee 2i 0i mi Bedy ee d a r ake P ert her arte Exe Greetreciar Tah a aui 210 00 knti TEE Mand 7 i gg rahe Far aalir Holbrina hiu Pi i i Ata esa tt ahi Fig 406 Direct input of energy consumption values in unlinked energy evaluation rooms Most parameters can be edited in the common manner others can only be read and some others can be edited normally and are resettable to an internally calculated value in addition i P i 1g Zhen eur Prise Tape Ghee long ict Brian Dapa TERS ane aero sup Boersma M seer Oo ere Tee niebefadtor sur lihag
228. rks with any area also for tilted floors or ceilings You can now change between the scale mode and the rotate mode of an object by hitting the tabulator key In any CAD view there is now a tape measure available In 2D views it gives you the distance between two points in 3D it gives you the distance and the height Smaller changes in the existing functionality The automatic cutting of holes in calculation surfaces has been improved If an object furniture room element is going through a calculation surface its shape is automatically cut from the calc surface In the luminance diagram it is now possible to define four different gamma angles to be plotted The settings for the emergency properties of luminares have been improved DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 10 DIALux Version 4 4 e Improvements in the presentation of luminous intensity diagrams e DIALux is now completely Windows Vista compatible e The standard directory for project files raytracing pictures and log Tiles has been changed to the my documents folder Making an update the files are copied automatically e Online Plugins can now be used in the protected mode of the internet explorer in Win vista e The DIALux file name is now stated in the title bar of the DIALux software e Inthe DIALux Light there is now a button to centre a luminaire arrangement in the room DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 11 DIALux Version 4 4 Installation The ins
229. rniture walls windows doors but not on a virtual calculation surface The light colours and colour filters can only be used on luminaires Inside of an object room or furniture the texture Is assigned to all surfaces with the same colour or texture For example if the walls in a room have the same colour and you drag a masonry texture to one wall the texture Is assigned to all other walls at the same time When you want to assign the texture only to one surface you can hold the Shift key while you drop the texture to the surface When you hold the Ctr key while you drop the texture onto a surface all surfaces e g the walls the ceiling and the floor of a room get the same texture Edit Placed Textures When a texture is not placed properly on a surface you can correct this afterwards DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 85 DIALux Version 4 4 alfin Biik p m p pe o fe ee a Jagd stk ow a ang x i i Juss A A Bi able a eee Chao a on to k Sea Pa Fig 122 Edit textures on an object Select the object in the CAD view The nspector shows the Property Page Surfaces of the object with the additional information about the texture If for example the texture has the wrong rotation you can correct it on the Property Page Texture similarly you can scale or move the texture If you want to mirror a texture you can easily do it by entering a minus symbol in front of the len
230. rojektmanager Street Element a K Duplicate Current Scene Furniture Room Wizard Room elements Windows and doors Exterior scene elements Calculation surfaces Calculation points Textures Control group Light scenes Fig 301 Insert Standard Street via menu or from The Guide The Guide Ax Indoor Lighting Outdoor Lighting Street Lighting Edit street aq Insert Standard gee Edit street elements Fig 302 Insert Standard Street via The Guide DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 188 DIALux Version 4 4 You can calculate your projects also by means of our quick street planning wizard see also chapter Working with Wizards Quick Street Planning Wizard To use this click with the left mouse button on DIALux Wizards in the WELCOME window Jii d xl The emia ka Pe a share Le D Jee Ss Sd Se ee Fig 303 DIALux wizards Quick street planning wizard If you do not see the WELCOME dialogue any more you will find the wizards in the menu File gt Wizard J Sioa ee rme l te es gt rg oe my m es eg pe ee Let Prope Cee te Fig 304 Wizards via Menu This wizard guides you through the quick planning for streets ee ALA in tha Die Ping rn ae one E im ammi gales pm p erh Pe arempi rya ee ee pea E ba bday ma ee ee L eee H lee pe M T eee a ergs h ed Leeper bee eer Lie
231. round the room Also the room can be raised if it necessary e g a room in a higher floor The obstruction shades the direct light as well as the reflected light which hits the obstruction objects ieee hl amaaan of Posies Sie alki Ey m E b gE pi ipa p o ET id E FF 3 acle a p a azaj Dt VEE Bs ible sf ees ches k Pah Dea E hhi r pia fhe a ai i Te mm l z l 3 P i fp rF Ta up enm i Jj e pa E Mm m Te Er i m hs eo ed B Pa uae ip id a ae f A ami F Pm i e 21m dj nim om rind jones a Ei EN LEE yP Fig 216 Obstruction in CAD view DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 141 DIALux Version 4 4 Sun and shadow visualisation The direct incidence of sunlight in the room can be simulated on a real time basis For this an OpenGL compatible graphic card is necessary The incidence of light by windows and or skylights is calculated as a function of place orientation geometry and date and Ja gd EITE eA A p E AR EE ee E F FN aE Fig 217 Sun and shadow visualisation At the top left of the Inspector there are two sliders With these the date and time can be changed on a real time basis and the path of the incidence light in the room can be simulated Settings in the calculation dialogue Before starting the calculation you have the possibility to select the scenes to be calculated in the calculation window Other settin
232. rs whose Pluglns are not yet installed A double click on the corresponding names of the manufacturers opens its internet page There you can download the DIALux Plugin Additionally teleohone numbers and e mail addresses are displayed At the bottom of the list the last used luminaires are always indicated This can be up to 20 luminaires of different manufacturers Gereral Despa Tectracal Data The Guide a x Indoor Lighting Edit room o Insert New Room Pa Load DXF file Doubleclick ft Edit Room Geometry on a Plugin to g Insert ceilings ground and open i columns Insert equipment fea Place Furniture Select Texture Double click Plan lighting der opens ninr Select Lurninalr Hiji pict ret hime Y z e5 aD ean page of the Ch Insert Single Luminaire epi J manufacturer Orbe saare veut Fa Insert Luminaire Field E Insert Line Arrangement i Insert Circle Arrangement Calculation objects Insert calculation surfaces Insert calculation points fal Ther ie iir ee ee z Eoen meide Linking to Outdoor Lighting k online Catalogues 2 Street Lighting Light scenes include pemi luminaire Emergency Lighting ow DUAL i SAPIA fies without af DUL JiS ahi Pluoin 3 Daylight Fig 126 Launch luminaire tree DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 89 DIALux Version 4 4 Online Catalogues In DIALux it is possible to insert luminaire Tiles over so called Online Catalogues functioning similarly as installed Pl
233. rt eet 176 2 Ha ST OC ee Pe en ROR eT Ree eT 176 technical data of the luminaires ee eeeeeeeseeaeeeueeeeaeees 92 Technical Report of the European committee for standardisation CEN TR 13201 1 aaaanennennennnnnnrrennn 193 texture Otalea exU E ssn EE 86 textures EE S aN i E E E E EET 86 MPOT TEXTES ssn a E tasty enamamaiacs 87 7 Tool tips for calculation results 145 IRIENN e EEE E E E A AE E EE E N 3 R e aE E E E A A 177 UGR TODE a a a I ENR 177 EWN CECT Mese A 179 UNONA nea N A 190 Upward Hont RaO ssc peters a E ain deen tadane tad 184 RISE IIL ACE aen a A ENEN OE 32 valuation field cc ceccccccecccccceccecececsceeeeeecseceeeeseseneee 190 207 a esses cane a ees in ie ae en 76 Vertical UMINANCE cccceccceccececececcecececeucececeeceeeeneetarenes 201 ae e erent er erent E E ee et ReneS oem te ESE ere ee 252 MCS IES IE acco cert oat Sts E a cats at eel E A tacit 149 www dial de Upda Koko deepen vere pearea riers ee nent ere retiree eer er ere VEN een ee earn 3 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 296
234. rt options Render small luminaires as enlarged Export objects as 2D projection Use settings of an imported DWG DXF file Export Text as Unicode e g for Asian Languages Your CAD program must support this function and a suitable font must be selected Fig 385 DWG DXF Export dialogue Options In the DWG DXF Export dialogue you can specify which information should be exported When you want to import your DIALux planning into the original drawing it is useful to use the settings of the imported drawing Optionally DIALux can create a legend that is embedded into the CAD drawing which contains a part list of the used luminaires Energy Performance of Buildings Background information Under the Kyoto protocol Europe is committed to reduce CO emissions seriously One instrument to achive this is the directive 2002 91 EC Energy Performance of Buildings Directive of the European Parliament and Council The directive s requirements hold for both new and to be renovated buildings and for both residential and non residential buildings Member states of the EU were committed to implement this directive into national right As a guideline the EU created a general framework for the calculation of energy performances of buildings which stated which aspects the calculation methodology must include at least These aspects particularly are heating ventilation air conditioning hot water supply and lighting To
235. rts e Allow or restrict the selection of furniture e Allow or restrict the selection of surfaces e Allow or restrict the selection of windows doors calculation surfaces e Allow or restrict the selection of calculation points L Avom i finor plan jion 1 20 View IES Fol pin 1 La ie 350 im ain g rhe 1m 2 4 m f dii mm Di ra iL Fig 138 Manipulating a luminaire within an arrangement The figure above illustrates how individual luminaires within a field arrangement can be modified The selection filter allows the selection of individual luminaires The luminaire position is unchanged This option for example can be useful when directing individual spotlights in a luminaire arrangement towards furniture pieces DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 96 DIALux Version 4 4 In the nspector the luminaire properties can be changed Here it is possible to select the arrangement type and the dimensioning type of luminaire fields Projektmanager Luminaire Mounting height Arrangement Arrangement Dimensioning Symmetrical Luminaire Wwiithin Luminaire Centre Luminaire Edges to Luminaire C Outer Edge to Outer Edge Fig 139 Selecting the arrangement type of a luminaire field The selected arrangement type as well as the dimensioning influences the field properties dx Luminaire edge Symmetrical within Luminaire centre to Luminaire centre Luminaire edge to Luminaire edge Fig 14
236. rtup Dialogue After the installation DIALux always starts with a Welcome window In this window you can click with the left mouse button on DIALux Wizards If you do not see this Welcome dialogue any more you will find the wizards in the menu File gt Wizards DIALux 4 1 View CAD Paste Lur Strg h Strg o Save 45 Send To Wizards Import Export Page Printer Setup Print Preview Print Strg P Settings Last Projects Opened b Fig 17 Launch DIALux Wizard DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 25 DIALux Version 4 4 A worked example using the wizard follows for a L shaped room with a luminaire arrangement to provide 500 Ix on the work plane 25m 3 m Gm Sm Bot A THEE cm Let Tat See Peoria ae hi Pik Welcome to the queck planrang wired They peed Sot pou Ghee an entre DL Gu The fokaj ie are cele s Fiera babe Diary 2 Samoan and plenary of lew r Dian of clang sect oe a Fig 18 Working with Wizards Start Click on the Quick Planning Wizard and then the following steps will be executed Confirm each of your steps by clicking on Next Vi mE He u Ce Qe ae Se G a Whe Lae iia gre Oe ee ee Be tiers ee ded gegen ee a ase Dia panai alone TE Fi jion Es 4 ial Sor aes ee eee oe oe i ee ach peg ai its bol hit T Amagute Ham E l hae Fee Poi Phe wv da Fico Papasra Che oy et eres the Lhe oe eer ete the peer n r aizan on
237. rum This includes those of a different type and in another arrangement DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 111 DIALux Version 4 4 E ae eee Fig 167 Drag and drop of a filter spectrum while holding down the control key IMPORTANT Holding down the SHIFT key makes only that light emitting element getting the filter that is picked by the mouse we ernst ee a ee Eel bee PERF See i irem Like biir WE Fig 168 Drag and drop of a spectrum filter on a rotatable element of a luminaire while holding down the shift key After a spectrum is added to a luminaire the Property Page Colour appearance tab displays the lamp spectrum the filter spectrum and the resulting colour data In the line lamp colour the name of the lamp spectrum is shown DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 112 DIALux Version 4 4 Technical Data Color appearance Rotations General dh Luminous emittance 1 Light colour Hioh voltage halogen Filter a Remove Lamp Filter Result Transmission 100 Fig 169 Spectrum of the lamp the filter and the resulting radiation Click on the triangle on the bottom right to get the Ra values Colour filters An optical filter is a device which selectively transmits light often a particular range of wavelengths representing a range of colours of light while blocking the remainder A filter can only block the specific unwanted range of wav
238. ry into the furniture tree The user can create subdirectories beneath the Furniture directory If you have received furniture files in the SAT file format SAT trom the manufacturers you can save these in the Furniture directory and use them in DIALux See also page 78 Moving the Coordinate Origin of an Object If you combine multiple objects the centre of the en compassing cube automatically becomes the coordinate origin This is not always the preferred position because when you Insert an object into your project via Drag amp Drop the origin is placed at the height Z 0 Before you Save a new object you should check and position the origin You can do this in the nspector when you go to the Property Page Origin algi Ej Sem mer ia Bp iee g oie e nd en Fi Bore oe 2 4 TE WTH 1AA ich hae Ta Fig 245 Specify the coordinate origin To define the origin visually press the A t button When you now move the object s coordinate cross the coordinate origin is moved instead of the object itself To change the height or to deactivate the pick grid when movements are made use the Shift and Ctrl buttons If you now save the object the new coordinate origin is also saved DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 158 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 246 Coordinate origin which was moved outside the cube Resetting the rotation of the origin To create complex models from several simple ones sometimes
239. s and doors s s s 84 121 Insert textures via Drag amp DOP cceeccceeeeeeee eee ees 85 122 Edit textures ON aN ODjeCt ee eeeeccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 86 PS sa Y aoa 4 10 a a CAN eR 86 124 Import textures Into DIALUX cc ceccecccee ee eeee sees 87 TD Ds DUpPlicate roO See eena EEr E RE 88 PAs eel areat ela allars acon Tee aren mate enreienn wee nee 89 127 Launch online catalogues ccccceeccceceeeee ee eeeeees 90 128 Insert individual IUMINAIFES cece eceeee ee eeees 91 129 Luminaire selection dropdown list cccceecceeee 91 SOMA OUTING Ta teeth cer trtinclee E 92 131 Modifying the technical data of luminaires 92 132 Helo Tay S Or MMU AIC Sere eases cates Gat eecute tact 93 133 tuminare witi DDC eraan 93 134 Mouse mode to define illumination point 94 135 Selection of individual luMInaireS cccceee 95 136 Align a spotlight to a picture ccsecscsccrcrrcenn 95 137 Insert luminaire fields without wizard 0606 95 138 Manipulating a luminaire within an arrangement 96 139 Selecting the arrangement type of a luminaire field 97 140 Effect of arrangement type and dimensioning type on the luminaire field dimensions 0000 97 141 Luminaire field insert frames depending on the arrangement typa eenen te 98 142 Luminaires used in the arrangement 98 143 Rotating the arrangement and the luminaires 99 144 LUMI Ibe field P
240. scenes and streets are not part of the evaluation Properties of the room and the project geometry obstruction location and north alignment are automatically identified analysed and recycled for energy evaluation by DIALux The same holds for windows and roof lights Particularly daylight supplied and not daylight Supplied assessment zones are determined automatically The specific connected load is no problem for the user too it is taken directly from the planned luminaires in the room DIALux 4 4 is designed in such a manner that a light planner is able to do a light planning under optimal lighting data aspects that fulfills energetic requirements at the same time with as little additional expenses as possible Ideally the additional energy evaluation needs only a few mouse clicks Structure of an energy evaluation project Once an energy evaluation is part of a DIALux project there is an energy evaluation project beneath the DIALux project DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 235 DIALux Version 4 4 fProgebtmanager Aigemrin ie ner peter Sung Per Fi 5797 w J Propet lt h zire am i i ram E Fig 387 Energy evaluation project in project tree For this energy evaluation project a standard according to which the evaluation will be done can be selected Currently EN 15193 and DIN 18599 are possible Multiple simultaneous energy evaluation projects are not allowed An energy evaluation project is animated b
241. settings The grid distances can be equal in all three directions but can also be different for X Y and Z Bhe ti Pare feeaeimaa b Das jarmi iaia fil Tig Eee rer bbe men larehin Pemai Hie A J i r ry g ns gy E b E EF F eA k 4 pm Ji i j 7 J j kt ee eae alallaan pu ee BOG Pee ped Peer pe fhe il G Fi zry pmp ae reaf pr i 1 Pegi beta r ory ikr Fiw bn Gee ime a ag i 0 5m a m gir E i j Pens S y i Ba Ea E E i ca E a i Fig 254 Fixed grid with a spacing of 0 5m in X and Y direction If you want to move an object for a short period without a grid just hold down the SHIFT key while you place the object This is valid for all grids and help lines To make the snap grid a visible tool as well use the same settings for the display grid as you do it for the snap grid The colour can also be changed to have a better contrast for example against a background DWG file Automatic help lines Those objects which are already placed in a room or exterior scene can be used to align other objects Moving an object you will recognize that in orthogonal direction there is a higher gravity than in any other direction So moving along X Y or Z axis is simple Those objects bounding boxes of furniture walls luminaires room elements which are already in the scene can create automatically temporary help lines to align other objects to DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 163 DIALux Version 4 4
242. she Hirini 2u ren DAL te Rh COA tet A ewigen mt folgenden aLr Sua Baur kimen meh ia i e Deere tung ar hi mr fel in che ganem ae rahi Wie gii de ee hem biekie meda Vie plk mpl di Mia her nT rni L Ant j A Projet 1 i i l Ti neir Lae pn ners Leute ill Frey peter tung 2 bee peewee bine F done 1 al o Aam i ner pebemertng Raun Cnengiebenvertung Unbeichteter Berech t B itadie Beret 1 Ej iwi TESE Ba bot hegre f amp Emen ium 2 E Ltt ete eee L B Let Aer tere ts Fig 399 Energy evaluation rooms with and without link to DIALux rooms The linking of energy evaluation rooms and DIALux rooms has many advantages Many aspects of the Started or even completed light planning can be automatically transfered to the energy evaluation with such links The complete geometry of the DIALux room is analysed for the energy evaluation and this does not only mean the ground area and height but even the daylight relevant informations like position and properties of windows and root lights the orientation north alignment and obstruction etc One of the most important steps during energy evaluation the determination of daylight supplied assessment zones happens completely automatically All technical informations about luminaires and lamps are transfered as well You do not need to think about mapping of total power values of luminaires and associated parasitic power values to assessment zones or even use so
243. spector Here you can change the name of the wall and you can display the output results If a shadow is displayed after the calculation e g in the 3D rendering you must define the calculation grid in the outputs A better display will result from a smaller calculation grid by increasing the number of points Naturally the consequence of a smaller calculation grid is an increase in the calculation time for your computer DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 73 DIALux Version 4 4 fag ame tems Fee al al m Le ee cee ee ee ee E EES el TL _ jarg j i apj Gm ABT u SE Moal tea ccoa Aaj F __ S p jh ee ra lee a ai aa ERREEN rest m ae Am i PE mp eee EE F as HEFE m Fig 100 Properties of a wall Name On the second tab Materia you adjust the material properties for the wall The reflectance value changes in response to new material choice You can specify an alternative reflectance directly in the reflectance box _SDIALux 4 1 Room 1 3D iew File Edit View CAD Paste Luminaire Selection utp Doe A 3 JPL Bit REESE GE 2b Projektmanager Material Raytracer Options Color Reflection factor Material Bricks he Ely Project 1 Lood light ss Luminaires Used Fig 101 Properties of a wall Material In the Texture tab you can adapt the texture properties if you have placed a texture on the wall see page 85 In the Raytracer Options tab you can adjus
244. stbox on the left hand side the name can also be modified Projektmanager Maternal Calculating Grid T4 M Output Results Surface 10 Durara 11 kd Fig 249 Calculating grid and furniture surface output To include the calculation results of a certain surface in the output please check the Result Output checkbox in the Calculating Grid tab Time and again it is necessary to work on single surfaces of an object With complex objects with very many surfaces it may take a lot of time to find the required surface in the surface list of the object s Property Page To make this simple you can now select a single surface graphically Just right click the object on the required surface in the CAD and choose Select this surface from the context menu The required surface is selected in the Property Page and it can be assigned a colour a texture material and so on DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 160 DIALux Version 4 4 eT ee ee a el cere ee alee ai Fig 250 Selecting a single surface with the mouse DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 161 DIALux Version 4 4 Arrangement aids Measurement of distances Using the tape measure it is easily possible to tind the exact distances between objects in 2D and 3D view To start the tape measure just click on the icon or select the tape measure in the menu CAD Fig 251 The tape measure icon In the 2D view the tape measure is placed by clicking on two p
245. support the implementation of the directive in the EU member states the european committee for Standardization CEN created a set of CEN standards This set consist of more than 30 parts includes more than 40 Standards and drafts and covers 5 CEN technical committees A good overview can be found in http Awww buildingsplattorm eu epbd_publication doc P 02 EPBD_CEN Standards p2370 pdf DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 233 DIALux Version 4 4 The part concerning lighting is EN 15193 Energy performance of buildings Energy requirements for lighting Besides the european implementation there are national implementations for example in germany the DIN 18599 Energy efficiency of buildings This standard uses an integral approach for the calculation of the energy balance That is a joint evaluation of energy demands for all parts of the building heating ventilation air conditioning cooling humidification domestic hot water and lighting taking into account interactions between them and impacts on others For example the energy consumption for lighting is not only part of the energy balance for lighting but also an inner heating source and so an important part of heating and cooling For more information about the directive please visit site www buildingsplatform eu This site really covers everything about the directive that is worth knowing Why energy evaluation in DIALux In medium terms the energy perf
246. t DIALux Light Wizard has been available since DIALux version 3 1 With the help of this wizard it is possible to complete lighting designs quickly and simply This means that infrequent users of DIALux can readily use the program without having to train themselves fully in using the software After the installation you will find the DIALux Light Wizard on your desktop near the normal DIALux icon You can start the wizard by one double click If you have already started DIALux you will find the DIALux Light wizard in the menu File gt Wizards Wizard Selection E The following wizards are available x v DF Import Field Arrangements Line Arrangements i PRO Quick Planning Professional Quick Arched room L Shaped Room Planning Polygonal Roorn Rectangular Room Quick Street Planning his wizard guides you through an entire simple planning rea Fig 5 DIALux Light Wizard DIALux Light icon After starting DIALux Light you are welcomed by a startup window In this window the next steps that follow are explained To move to the next window click on Next Wialnama tn Gl Adin Light wind Waah Vd Oe Gates yot Cone plinn Ot Shedd Bobet Ss Dim a Ls dt E T Puen PEA bial ame Geers p Chee Coca ee td Lames ete Pe i erie er oe EP ihe BPS 2b oe pe a eee eS Pee lee 2 2 Le Pe Fig 6 DIALux Light Wizard Start DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 19 DIALux Version 4 4 In the
247. t emitting surface If a long luminaire is placed near to surtace the resulting image seems unrealistic If this option is switched on for each pixel depending on the distance to the light source the luminaire is subdivided into small luminous parts Of course this increases the calculation time With Indirect calculation you can specify the influence of the indirect lighting on the result The higher you select the part that indirect lighting plays the longer the calculation time becomes This option starts an elementary radiosity Without this option those objects which are not directly hit by rays are invisible The higher the accuracy that is chosen the longer the calculation takes but the quality increases For exterior scenes sometimes it could be better to skip the indirect calculation For a first preview the indirect calculation should be switched off or standard should be selected If directional lighting mainly spots is used high to very high indirect calculation should be selected For DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 260 DIALux Version 4 4 diffuse uniform illumination standard settings are adequate This setting defines the number of rays used for the calculation of the indirect light on each pixel The more rays there are the more correct the results are e Project preferences After POV Ray completed its work by default the rendered image bitmap bmp is stored in the directory as standard prefere
248. t 830 D65 high pressure sodium metal halide ceramic and metal halide quartz To get rid of a filter you can either click on the Remove button in the colour appearance Property Page or you drag and drop a no filter filter onto the luminaire No filter is always in the top of the filter subfolders Light colours in the ray tracing The used light colours and colour filters are automatically handed over to PovRay There is no further setting necessary to use colours in the ray tracing visualisation White balance The white balance is used to adjust the rendering on the monitor to the colour temperature of the lights in the scene Digital and analogue recording of videos and pictures offer the option to use white balance to correct pictures This imitates the ability of the human eye for chromatic adaptation Fig 173 Four identical photos using different values for the white balance Source wikipedia foto Thomas Steiner DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 115 DIALux Version 4 4 In the menu view you can select Set white balance Selecting this function you can choose different settings for using the white balance Please keep in mind that also your monitor has a setting for a white balance or at least for a colour temperature These settings can counteract the software settings White balance Carry out white balance Use Automatic Manual white point 3500K 6500K 10000K Here you can set the colour
249. t click on a helpline while the surface is in edit mode mh rii Dee eet raa CS eg Delage Lecter a fete pee at Lid bee De LECEN ET ee ete a E aoe Peni I ERA CETE rs Pi 2 ee oo ho A i hae i Ea Tii m ij Ti i T TI z ik Tia TT i C bhreig i Behi Spee I f ee i E i Hai pm E Aea J P it 4 A i 1E is i gt r p 8 pi uy el fe Cau fo Charan tailed E z b a Ge ee ee ja fee ren B Fig 60 Taking over the shape of a helpline for the room geometry DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 51 DIALux Version 4 4 Optimise Personal Settings The presetting that DIALux has can be changed You can find all the menus for modification under File gt Settings _SDIALux 4 1 Room 1 3D iew CAD J New Strg h fir EF Open Strg O Close Paste Luminaire Selection Output Window 7 3 BwebLows Rs albo aes amn p B Room 1 all Save Strg 5 thod Room Surfaces q Save 45 Send To oS Wizards Import Export 4 Sa Print Preview g Print Strg P I Settings Fi General Options Last Projects Opened Customize Toolbars and Keyboard Exit Fig 61 Menu Settings General Options The menu General Options has 5 tabs with various settings Under Standard Values you can specity the national typical settings Room Dimensions Reflectance Work Plane etc Here you can determine which standard values D
250. t homepage of the manufacturer is FI a ii nee T i Deg mim eir A E n me OA aL EE Shoe o e Lorris iea j Sey ee Lae T GH j icra F O 1 amr 75N Fm TE ee ee a a a ris Fra FR ip te iss E p JJ F rm m h ee ee a i iE L Tia Fig 39 Plugin Tree Luminaire selection DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 37 Create your own luminaire database Insert delete search for specified criteria Display of luminaire images and technical data DIALux Version 4 4 Installed Plugins are automatically recognized by DIALux It is not required to reinstall the Plugins after updating from older DIALux versions Double click on a Plugin to open it You can also access this option via the Luminaire Selection menu Plugins provided by our partners that have not yet been installed are located a bit lower in the tree structure A double click on a Plugin which has not been installed opens the Internet Explorer window and the homepage of the luminaire manufacturer is displayed if available Some manufacturers provide individual luminaires or entire plugins for downloading here The User Database The user has the possibility to select those luminaires from the various manufacturers Plugins which are regular used in the DlAlux project These luminaires can be saved in the User Database It is also possible to search for luminaires and to delete luminaires ig ty haahi her
251. t the properties which the wall should have if you have Started the Raytracer provided by DIALux DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 74 DIALux Version 4 4 Insert Room Elements Modity a Room with Room Elements With DIALux you have the possibility to modify the room with room elements For example you can insert a sloped ceiling that cuts the existing wall surfaces and creates new surfaces called ceiling 2 The other room elements like the flat ceiling become a part of the room as well and you can create new room surfaces at the t meRBERE ai i bi tian Fig 102 Edit rooms Insert room element To insert room elements into a room first of all you have to open the Furniture tree Then select the file Room Elements All room elements are displayed in the centre of the window You can insert these simply by Drag amp Drop into the 3D view or the ground plan view You can likewise create the room elements in the ground plan view Particularly the scaling option of the room elements is easier in the ground plan view You can scale and rotate the room element simply by using the mouse TERDEE a fe ii z ot E 2 een fo Fim ar aHa Ng mi oe iad eu j jhi i j 1 imi i E i iem z F cr ope am bl too la 4 aa a L i ale Lae TILE ii DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 75 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 103 Edit rooms Edit room element With DIALux it is possible to insert the following room eleme
252. tain the same luminaire The complete light scene can be calculated as a whole or all necessary control groups of a light scene are calculated and the result can be changed afterwards interactively by changes in the light scene Generate a project with light scenes and control groups Insert a new room and adapt all settings in the accompanying Property Pages see chapter Edit Room Data Subsequent you can Insert the luminaires which you would like to use in your project Select those which you want to assign to a control group If you have inserted a luminaire field you should activate the function Allow single luminaires selection because the possibility exists to select single luminaires DIALux offers the option to add your luminaire arrangement s to one or several control groups In the menu gt Paste gt Control group as well as in the context menu in the CAD window or in the Project manager you can add your selected luminaire s to a new or existing control group DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 117 DIALux Version 4 4 rece mm pH sen erar F ais aS ee ees fos et EEH pe sah eeu eb en TET i Pim Lg meen t te at ot Ma ie kta mn T e 7 a Fig 176 Paste a control group Context menu of the room rere ree Ae r emer hg ARR fe 8 een el Eee im Eii meg iar a Ss Aii iia k Si e Fig 177 Paste a control group Context menu in the CAD view Then in the Project manager the con
253. tallation of DIALux is easy to do Please close all other application programmes before installing DIALux Installation after Internet Download After you have downloaded the DIALux Setup version no exe from our homepage www DIAL de or www dialux com on your hard disk you can start this file by one double click with the right mouse button Afterwards you can follow the simple instructions on the screen The installation program of DIALux may require you to install a newer version of the Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 5 5 or higher is needed this can be downloaded from www microsott com The setup checks automatically which components are needed for your computer and automatically downloads them DIALux Setup Installere erforderliche Software Bitte warten Installiere von Dl Lus benotigte Microsoft Komponenten Jet 4 0 5P6 Bitte warten Fig 1 DIALux Setup The setup enables you to install only those components you really need Missing components can be added easily later by starting the setup again DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 12 DIALux Version 4 4 2 DIALux Setup Paket auswahlen Bitte markieren Sie die Programmpakete die Sie installieren mochten Programmpakete _ Aubenszene A Mobel fur lnnen und Aubenszenen a m Testuen C Innenraum C Aubenszene E m Sprachen C Danisch Deutsch C Englisch GB C Englisch LIS Estnisch Summe erforderlicher Speicher 0 byt
254. temperature manually which is to appear as white The automatic system attempts to use optimal settings based on the light scene Apply Fig 174 Adjusting the white balance Deselecting the checkbox Carry out white balance can make your rendering appear unrealistic and give a colour cast We suggest using the automatic mode If manual correction is necessary switch of the automatic mode and adjust the slider to the colour temperature of the light in the rendering DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 116 Adding luminaire arrangement to control group DIALux Version 4 4 Light Scenes and Control Groups Definition DIALux supports the planning of dynamic light controls e g on the base of DALI There is the possibility to define luminaire groups switch and dimming levels to calculate light scenes to visualize and to process the planning results for easy implementation Light scenes define the changeable qualities of the contained control groups as for example dimming levels light colour inclining and panning the luminaire and LDC In light scenes groups of luminaire arrangements are called control groups Requirements Any luminaires can be added to control groups and also an individual luminaire can be included within an arrangement Luminaires can exist in more than one control group Light scenes can contain one or several control groups Control groups cannot exist at the same time in the light scenes which con
255. the calculation results The surface is invisible when viewed DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 174 DIALux Version 4 4 from the other side No results are calculated for the invisible side These objects can be scaled and rotated like all other furniture Exception windows and doors are always plane parallel to the respective wall Calculation surfaces for different types of illuminance The calculation surfaces in DIALux can now calculate different types of illuminance As well as calculating the normal namely the planar illuminance perpendicular to the receiving plane it is now possible to explicitly calculate vertical planar horizontal planar and camera directed planar illuminance and also semi cylindrical and cylindrical illuminance a pE p E oe p Gee ee E Laie a 2 oe ee EG i i AD PER ama eB ae aufeen ones 4al F Soke mig TEk F ti jm Fig 281 Different types of illuminance Projektmanager Geometry Calculation Surface Type Ferpendicular lluminance Perpendicular luminance Vertical lHumnance s 0 000 Horizontal luminance i Semi cylindrical luminance Cylindrical luminance Camera Unentated llumnance Camera Fo Rotation Fig 282 Property Page of calculation surface Selection of the types of illuminance Penetration If calculation areas are penetrated by furniture e g cupboard and working surface these are now automatically cut out of the
256. the activation or deactivation of the parameters to be optimised The purpose of the optimization Is to find the maximum pole distance the minimum height above the work plane the minimum overhang and or the minimum inclination slope The optimisation is carried out before the arrangement is placed however it can be accomplished after the insertion Projektmanager r Luminaire Pole Boom Optimization Arangement Type single row top a Valuation Field 0 750 c 0 400 0 600 15 000 Pres Distance E Height above workin 6 000 F Overhang 0 000 Fig 347 Insert Street Arrangement Optimise Alternatively you can enter the values numerically in order to fix the minimum maximum or the step width of the respective parameters To insert the luminaire arrangement in your street project please click on the Paste button In the context menu of the street arrangement you can optimise individually the arrangement of your luminaires To do this select with the right mouse button the street arrangement in the Project manager DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 212 DIALux Version 4 4 dios i a Pa pi al FI BEE SS ee eee ee EE E idgde tea n heroas E j panj El SER a Bibl fl i biad buma Moe pl he iammm F i i f 1 a I Ti i L El E y O Bisse de es E me a n E p fe La J i Fo a e oom 2 os Py ib FY het
257. the context menu DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 105 DIALux Version 4 4 Phe ES Flee ee Pe ee ee oada hid otf cao fl VERE Bake af ees ceea af Pir geen Ft te ee ee Fig 158 Aligning luminaire arrangements Context menu Then the function Set illumination point to CO GO or C90 G0 or Imax is activated and you can align the luminaire arrangements see also chapter Aligning Luminaires aiki Th E wl ape H ee ee atts a onura E Ea Hha ERTI T CEEETTTErT Meedia a E EE E EE a mt Fn an _ ben ete jeri F i PE a ER Fig 159 Set illumination point Aligned luminaire field Calculation of luminaire geometry included On request the user can now include luminaire geometry in the calculation This is not necessary with normal surface mounted or recessed luminaires Extended pendant luminaires which emit light directly or indirectly may hang in their own shadow perhaps making it necessary to consider the luminaire geometry Coloured light Background information Up to now DIALux only calculated white light The amount of light energy distributed by the luminaire was defined by the luminous flux of the lamp s and the DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 106 DIALux Version 4 4 light output ratio of the luminaire The spectral distribution the wavelengths of the distributed radiation was not taken into account This approach is usua
258. the important details on one page Reem Single Sheet Output ay Tet Heigl i een FRED a al cng Hig a2 ree be ieee et oe Pg ghee imie Bote E ri ten i Cet By wr dary ere on Thi roi Cave mna ning ja LEE D es hi doa g Pe O Od Cedi ig Plo iO LLA lumenia Fwi Lig Japa Pwi Dmi gi a bobo i dily ii A Ba DE Gh E ft A Beeriid were eal Bee eS a tl Fig 30 Working with Wizards Single Sheet Output DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 31 DIALux Version 4 4 The DIALux User Interface DIALux has adopted the user interface of Windows XP Dynamic settings of the toolbar the new and much more comprehensive Guide simpler dialogues to guide the user all make working much easier and much faster us ia aliz E p g ie cee p p aF j of PY TIELE E od EF gird warty Bee oR aes oe eee Se ae ee Bia tee ee HEE mi a BEA OGE SS eS M n Depa egiin or k Project manager smee with Inspector T gme e ie l bes CE ES sima 2 jjam CE e m Fig 31 DIALux user interface The DIALux user interface is divided into three main work areas e CAD window e Project manager with Inspector e The Guide These three work areas enable effective and clearly arranged planning of lighting installation with DIALux In each of these areas you can access certain software functions or edit objects The Project manager includes the Inspector and the respective tree structure project furniture colour l
259. the menu File gt Export gt Save Output as PDF eo a ES eee Ss EE jt a om oe j co pa riuany ts Sa wey Maaj eee oe i jam Wirm be ee U O i _ eel al tee fit minr i j me oo am j a Fig 370 Export the output to a PDF file This menu is only available if one output window is active Then you are asked to specify the directory and the name of the PDF file Exporting to PDF can take some time if you have a large project but usually it is twice as fast as printing the output Once you have the PDF file you can send it to your customer The PDF file cannot be modified Export Output Graphics tables text and graphic When the output in DIALux is opend doubleclick on the desired output sheet any type of output can be selected for copy and paste by a right click on it Further on tables graphics and text can be saved in a file gt gees a m hE a eee pee lee E ia H aa a a a T u a E F a E A i i E T ie E a 9 m oe m ii fig pm GLP Hmm Hia ee i m i J I i i r LEren a j i lp es P oe ie un i m m Fig 371 Export the output table to a file or copy it into the clipboard DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 226 DIALux Version 4 4 E IaH a TETI E zai E a a j aa m E a ae i i EES a je E Lapa rl mm ia ENA i wef barisa Bees 1 nAi aera Bred i m a 1 p Fe ld m D O s a m _ F ar he in le ey ee
260. there are absolutely no informations about luminaires and lamps All parameters for the energy evaluation have to be set manually by the user himself In this process the user can restrict himself by just editing the consumption values of the energy evaluation room directly or work on lots of parameters to calculate such consumption values DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 243 DIALux Version 4 4 fame und Reaching Serechen Ergebnisse 4 F Grundache 2 0 mi Deia fer e direkt eingeben und alle Parenter igi er Faergenccdart Aneurhemng 710 00 bahja Tkabbir bta 5 00 kanhi Pita ietneeurhtungi 1 00 ith ja A aes Li Pania T Projet Sy verwendet Leuctben ig Erger un fore 1 Bi Iae 2 E Eege angam I al Uniekchiele Berentr 1 Fig 402 Working on the assessment zone of an unlinked energy evaluation room The possibilities of working with unlinked energy evaluation rooms in DIALux are relatively rudimental right now Each such room has exactly one assessment zone without daylight supply More assessment zones can t be created daylight supply can t be added However their main purpose is only to include rooms in the whole energy performance evaluation process which have no light planning and whose energy consumption values are known from other sources In fact you could do an energy performance evaluation in DIALux completely without linked rooms But by doing so you would abandon all advantages DIALux
261. ting calculation surfaces or task areas 174 280 Transparent calculation surfaces ceceeeeeeeeeeeees 174 281 Different types of INUMINANCE eee eeeeeeeees 175 282 Property Page of calculation surface Selection of the types of INU CC ecn 175 283 Edit work area and surrounding area 0 176 284 Calculation POINTS sieni tte ati iacatitt as 177 285 Insert UGR objects into a OOM 178 286 Viewing direction of an UGR observer a se 179 287 Stal WUD CAO GUC es at Settee et heii 180 288 Start DIALux 4 2 with a new exterior scene 180 289 Insert a ground element trom the furniture tree via Drag e Bc 0 aerate reer E eee ter eee ene 181 290 A ground element cee ccc cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 181 291 Calculate results of a surface oo eeceeeeeeeeeeeees 182 292 Illumination of a facade with a calculation surface in FONTON senini a AE 182 293 Property page of the GR Observer eiccen 183 294 Luminous flux that is taken into account for the ULR E PR IEA A E AE EIE E E EET 184 295 Luminous intensity calculation point 185 296 Property page for the outputs of the luminous intensity calculation point eeeessena 185 297 Calculation surface Street valuation field 186 298 Simple Street valuation field in an exterior scene 187 299 Complex Street valuation field in an exterior scene187 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 289 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig Fig Fig
262. tly and you can select if the different surfaces will be listed in the calculation output A ground element can appear as a hole inside of another ground element The grey ground element and the selected ground element in the figure above are such holes that are cut out of the green meadow In this example DIALux will not create calculation results for these parts of the outer meadow Floodlight Illumination To calculate the floodlight illumination of objects or buildings you start with an exterior scene On top of the ground element you place the object you want to illuminate Now you can select a surface of the object a TEN pmp pj pi aal f ROA i pa rpa EERI ul S wa suj ess T saj mrap Ejim e Bee Er Se pee Er i 1 en ew LB Fig 291 Calculate results of a surface or you can place a calculation surface in front of the object a wel t Pisa ae oes Pi ite FY Bet GS D nm Fig 292 Illumination of a facade with a calculation surface in front of it DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 182 DIALux Version 4 4 Lighting Design according to prEN12464 Part 2 EN8995 2 Glare Rating The draft of EN 12464 2 EN 8995 2 intends that glare has to be avoided for outdoor working places To ensure this glare limits for tasks and activities are prescribed The glare rating system GR is defined in the CIE publication 112 1994 For glare evaluation the veiling luminances produced by the luminair
263. tly next to each other first The position in the room exterior scene does not matter at all DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 168 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 267 Copy along a help ilne with the mouse Start with selecting the object to be copied Than make a right click and select Copy along a help line trom the context menu Now there is a symbol at the mouse to select the desired help line that should be used as a path where the object should be copied along When the mouse is above a help line a small hook appears that tells you that this help line can be selected The line is selected with a left click ow P Fig 268 Mouse symbol to select a help line for copying Once the desired help line is selected the inspector offers the possibility to define the desired number of copies and the distance between them i pa img Le ee j E TE T a oe CP E a cri a a ol ea i p 1 ay tae ama a ae fa a Fig 269 Copying in the standard setting with placing objects in the vertex If the standard setting is selected DIALux places the first object in the start point the last one in the end point and in every vertex also a copy The distance between objects placed within two vertices will be averaged to keep the number of objects and the rsulting distance close to the desired values in the inspector DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 169 DIALux Version 4 4 If the second setting is selected
264. to design an emergency lighting project for the UK market it will be possible to define here the calculation according to Lighting Guide 12 to take into account the first reflection of direct light on the ceiling s This of course will be automatically switched on if the user selected the standard settings according the UK market global options like UGR SHR and illuminance quotient You can define for each light emitting object whether it is used for emergency lighting Projektmanager a a Control groups General Description Emergency Lighting ami Luminous emittance 1 M Use for emergency lighting f Only for Emergency Lighting In addition to normal use Emergency lighting f j E mergency power mode reference Emergency lighting luminous 3350 Im Colour rendering index s0 E Project 1 E Luminaires Used Fig 197 Property Page of emergency lighting For each luminaire and each LEO Light emitting object a luminaire may have more than one light output of a DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 129 DIALux Version 4 4 luminaire there will be a luminaire data sheet for emergency lighting available This datasheet offers important information about the LEO The first one will be a graphic for the Disability Glare Zone In this graphic the maximum intensity values of EN1838 Table 1 will be listed and in two sketches the maximum intensity values of the LEO for the flat floor and for the une
265. to select the 3D or the ground plan view If more than one CAD window is open you can arrange them as desired via the Window menu If the window is full screen you can change to another view via the tabs at the top of the screen Simultaneously working in multiple DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 34 Please note The red rotation point enables a rotation around the red axis likewise the blue and the green rotation points enable rotations around the blue and green axis respectively Please note Context menus are accessed via the right mouse button and Properties in the Inspector via the left mouse DIALux Version 4 4 windows is only recommended when working with a high screen resolution and a good display adapter If an object has been inserted into a room its context menu can also be accessed with a right click rotate around the green axis rotate around the blue axis Align and distribute a Copy Along 4 Line Ao Cut 4a Copy P w Delete Bll Adjust Brightness rotate around the red axis Move the object f Fig 37 Context menu of a selected object If the Rotate option is activated the object can be rotated by clicking and rotating the point on the boom The red rotation point enables a rotation around the red axis likewise the blue and the green rotation points enable rotations around the blue and green axis respectively Please keep in mind that the obje
266. trol group appears with a link to the luminaires The control group has the Property Page Name DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 118 DIALux Version 4 4 J eet EE lenen hee ip Baom l Wine pg ght eres TE Cowra goa i Cartel group f A sy Erh Comag grag 2 a Pao E Cnling La Al cutee ii wali wa fi eas wala 9 Loe Reid Ar angemere i Ta Unt Aani i aari reeet Pune GP Tade Flume oae Fig 178 Property Page of a control group If luminaires are deleted these are also removed at the same time from the appropriate control group provided that these belong to a control group In the menu Paste you can insert a light scene in your project a DIALux 4 1 Room 1 Light scene 2 Floor plan Je File Edit View CAD Luminaire Selection Output Windo eE el Ge Lc Be RE hy FE ES Projektmanager Mem Scene Luminaire Arrangement Street Element Furniture Room elements Control group 1 Windows and doors Exterior scene elements Calculation surfaces Calculation paints Textures Control group p Light scenes k E Project 1 Fig 179 Insert a light scene via menu Alternatively you have the option to insert a light scene from the context menu of the room DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 119 DIALux Version 4 4 Miimii Mie
267. ttings gt Customize Toolbars and Keyboard you can select the toolbars which you need most frequently As soon as you launch this function you can alter the existing Too bars With the left mouse button you can drag the functions which you do not need into the Command tab You can extract the functions which you need from the tab to the desired DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 56 Menu Reset user interface DIALux Version 4 4 position DIALux supports the standard Window s Shortcuts which you can launch by combinations of shortcut keys You can specity additional combinations in the tab Shortcut Keys The tab Options provides the option to select more settings in the menu LS j Salta omemeel Fagen Ayem erdeme Cavea Enyim Pje j T ies a cutters weet Bad Pw eer od He ede aba lc ell EE llc ell Tirkama Comeeels tobe fjir ser Jemari tiare urtara ee ware i F iie enjin i ai PT iee dea m in kare ia Fig 68 Menu Customise You can reset the user interface of DIALux in the menu to restore the default setting at the next start of DIALux algi En Tiba CEs ic re fi ee i od LE E PO Fig 69 Reset user interface DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 57 DIALux Version 4 4 Create a New Project If you click on the New button you will generate a new project DIALux can handle only one project at a time An already opened project must
268. ty Page to adjust the values You may select several surfaces using the Shift key or the Ctrl key The option Autobumbmaps assigns an additional structure like for example some ripple to the texture DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 264 DIALux Version 4 4 SES ee Fig 429 Raytracing options modify the surfaces The amount of reflection should be 5 10 Tor floors and 10 15 for glass The transparency of glass should be around 30 3 D Standard View for Raytracing The Raytracing is based on the 3D view of your room or scene where you can define the point of view the perspective and the display window of the image T Henn i Sie Fig 430 3D view for the rendering Starting POV Ray After you have adjusted the 3D view you can start POV Ray trom the menu File gt Export gt Calculate CAD view with POV Ray or via Raytracer icon DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 265 DIALux Version 4 4 a WE GS te ism umr mas Do tos i PSIE E a fa adma E EET LLL ai eee imi bs Sen eet fae ie a Fe T tn 7 z i s lae ee ee Sp oe oe FE Fig 431 Start the rendering If the POV Ray software is not yet installed the installation Is initiated now The necessary files have been copied during the installation of DIALux If you have further questions you can use the POV Ray help program you can find it in the folder at C Program Files POV Ray for Windows v3 6
269. u and Send problem report This will send an email to us that helps us solve the problem and helps you to get a more stable version After a crash this dialog opens automatically DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 14 DIALux Version 4 4 Install Luminaire Data About Plugins DIALux Is always delivered without luminaire data The so called Plugins with the luminaire data of the manufacturers are directly available from our project partners You can download the Plugins either from the respective homepage of our project partners or you can request a CD with the luminaire data You will find the appropriate links for our project partners alternatively there are teleohone numbers and contact addresses on our homepage www DIAL de under Data Plugins or you can click in the luminaire tree of DIALux on a not installed manufacturer Afterwards a window opens which displays the links of the corresponding manufacturers and contact addresses see page 37 After you have downloaded a Plugin close DIALux first before starting the Plugin by one double click Then an installation program activates and you can follow the instructions on the screen After completion of installation you can restart DIALux and in the luminaire tree a new Plugin is now displayed see page 37 You can activate the Plugin by one double click from DIALux If you want to install a Plugin trom a manufacturers CD close DIALux before proceeding if it is open then just
270. u can specify the reflection properties for ceiling walls and floor If you change the reflection properties for the walls you have to consider that always all walls of the room will be changed together DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 72 Deviation of north from the Y axis DIALux Version 4 4 Room Surfaces General Maintenance plan method i Alignment Standards Reflection Material Color Ceiling 70 x i R walls o z l Floor EN pa E E Project 1 Hh Luminaires Paper Ee Room 1 Metal ne bees 1 Workplane Fig 98 Edit room data Standard Floor Standard Vi all Standard Ceiling Mortar light Lime Cast Plaster of Paris Plast Marble The Alignment tab allows the setting of the north direction in relation to the Y axis For the room or the exterior scene the north direction can be set To show this clearly the north arrow is drawn near the coordinate origin ae Room Surfaces Alignment General Maintenance plan method i Morth alignment 0 0 z Deviation of north from the y axis Clockwise Fig 99 Edit room data Alignment Modity Properties of Individual Walls Select a wall in the 3D view so that it is indicated in red Alternatively in the Project manager you can select the corresponding wall and then similarly it is indicated in red As soon as you marked an object the properties of the wall selected will appear in the n
271. ue to copy the textures into a directory of the texture tree al aS oe P Eia n pwaden E i peasy te o cee eee oo ee Fig 124 Import textures into DIALux Within the colour tree textures can be moved copied or deleted Also subfolders can be created or deleted Just make a right click on the desired object Edit Room Geometry with DWG or DXF File Please read chapter DWG and DXF import and export starting trom page 228 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 87 DIALux Version 4 4 Duplicate Copy Rooms Scenes Streets Duplicate an Existing Room An identical room can be created by clicking Duplicate First select the original room in the tree and then select the Duplicate Room command from the context menu Please note that the room information is duplicated dimensions materials etc together with the objects inside the room luminaires and furniture Em oe ee ee a osda i a8 Jide fees G ERIN Bs Slesp e ccea Af Pe ilg bape ri Hke EAn iej Fig 125 Duplicate rooms DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 88 DIALux Version 4 4 Insert and Edit Luminaires and Luminaire Arrangements You can open the luminaire tree by clicking in The Guide Select Luminaires In the luminaire tree you will see installed Plugins under DIALux catalogues With one double click on a name of a manufacturer you can open a Plugin Under not installed Plugins you can find the DIALux project partne
272. ugins You can open an online catalogue by double clicking on the corresponding symbol in the luminaire tree Afterwards the online catalogue opens and you can insert a luminaire from the internet page of your manufacturer directly into your DIALux project In this way you can constantly access current files of your manufacturer ime Cae ia ere a fee i pe ap ipe Ea ben ie ape E Hihii Om ijir hee cel beer rete oe pm PE oe Double chek Opens on Torr the One Cg Ld LUES a ai ui E e pjan Fe i U E levers W binm ESETE Fi mf afam ee a P aF a er Fig 127 Launch online catalogues Hint Inserting luminaires over the online catalogue works only if this service is offered by the corresponding manufacturer Individual Luminaires Individual luminaires can be inserted into the room from the project or luminaire tree via Drag and Drop Simply pull the luminaire from the tree to the room The luminaire is inserted into the room at that position X and Y coordinates where you release the mouse button The way it is inserted influences the arrangement type Via Drag and Drop you can position luminaires only inside rooms DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 90 DIALux Version 4 4 In the future some luminaire manufacturers will supply Plugins from which luminaires can also be positioned via Drag and Drop E jk jE SES Ee es z F l E CEPTS E Pee 5 4 a a Seley ll Bh kee af een Locos bal a Sen ere fim
273. uminaire and output DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 32 DIALux Version 4 4 The CAD Window Raum 20 Few Fig 32 3D view of a room GP eaum 30 Mew y Raum 1 Floor plan cee Raum 1 Aen mis m mg UUE ETI i Tac T i i LiT Toh ER SET Iit mio OM o rl rs Pe oOo wE Fig 33 Ground plan view of a room In addition to the 3D and ground plan views you can also use the side and front view for interactive planning The CAD window is used for the interactive lighting design With the mouse you can graphically rotate zoom move and roam the room the street or the exterior scene The PAN or move option can always be accessed via the middle mouse button The Zoom option is assigned to the wheel if using a wheel mouse DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 33 Please note Open context menu with right mouse DIALux Version 4 4 The right mouse button is very important when working with DIALux Depending on the selected object the program mode and the working area different important options can be accessed Fig 34 Right mouse button Additionally you can move scale rotate or select objects inside or outside the room Right click to access a context menu it a aan me CEJ bia TFS ebai mare pik er Fig 35 3D CAD window context menu bki EEE Fig 36 Ground plan view context menu In the project manager you can right click inside the room
274. uminaire arrangement sian een E 47 54 Property Page of the luminaires within the selection 48 55 Room context menu right click ON roomMm 05 49 SE ROOM Edito E srai e an 49 S Nserta new Comen estensi a a a nents 50 58 Edit a ground eleMent cc eeecccccceeeeseeceeeeeeeenees 50 59 Create a polygonal Task Area above a desk 51 60 Taking over the shape of a helpline for the room GOMGUNY a sicesdatesieoiateowesceeiealaietaean 51 61 Menu Settings sensar A 52 62 General Options Standard Values ssiiessiieeeen 33 63 General Options Global nevi i cea ae 53 64 Start OPTIONS aaea a a 54 OI GPA OdESSA 55 66 General Options Output eee ccccceeeeteeeeeees 56 67 General Options Contact 0c cece ee eeeceeeee eens 56 68 Men CUSTOMISE is erecnectriveeecvets nected sea 57 69 RESeLUSEr I Ler aCe cna ai A 57 70 Create a NEW project ce cccccecccceeecceesneeeeeeneseeeaeess 58 71 Insert project details gtd oe ott techn Vell ed benassi 58 72 Insert Project data Location svicewinseistieeinies 59 73 Open a project in the startup dialogue 0 59 74 Open a project in the MenU sessiieesssireerirreerrnn 59 75 Project previ W nansa a uadl araulenidins 60 76 Edit Rooms Generate a NEW room nss 61 77 Edit Rooms Insert room coordinates ccce 61 78 Edit Rooms Zoom to the overall view of the scene 61 LIET ROOMS S D VIEW rrara ar 62 S0 Edit room data
275. uminaire parts The third icon trom left allows the selection of rotatable luminaire parts If you have activated this icon you can turn the luminaire with articulated joint to the desired position or you can specify the rotations in the appropriate Property Page iad a FLORE ete id ef cao LEBEL DB alive afews copa 2 af kas Ben hes re in ee ee j a aF ha bia m resmini a a ia TF a may erm E f WF a DM ia D ii a P DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 103 DIALux Version 4 4 Fig 153 Turn the rotatable luminaire part by mouse pointer You can also align the luminaire with articulated joint to CO GO C90 GO or Imax see similar chapter Aligning Luminaires Bee bee epee be ee a Jeeta ea er fe pma TA ECTE LETETT TET pi fiat Pr i i Cee So ee re WP fa kee pal n e e mt a eh aa Aa Fig 154 Align the rotatable luminaire part Unrestricted lighting arrangements With DIALux you can position the luminaires individually in a circle in a line or in a field You can then form them into groups to deal with them geometrically and or as an electrical unit Just add your desired luminaire arrangement to a new luminaire arrangement via context menu of the selected luminaire arrangement ee bt ape be i cr Iigd ath eee a hakan N ja praaj Ehi a a a 4 sf ee ee nmaieicia e t ime imei a e a n e i he e e a O a eT
276. updated once by changing into the Project manager and then back again into the furniture tree From there you can move them at any time like all other furniture into a room or exterior scene via Drag amp Drop into your CAD windows see also page 157 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 80 DIALux Version 4 4 Lp DLALUM 4 1 oon t 30 ew E oe GR yew CAD gate lumnaregeeton Cupu ind I Eea E eea 3 Bebhoms LA ella 4 2 raja k 4 fs fesa Freen a Vorschau Geometry in 7 Furniture Plex gt METE FP kio a F a cine E Ahar ba pall an K acon i i faw m con m Shen mii a oan LRN m ep mE epo a epo a apo f A Standard clerearts g Tice ciris E Wittens andl deg ag Exterior scene lerrents Aa Cabnulatian arf ao Camulgtion poris 7 Puree Files re ekr pA Ces Purdie Fi Hoban Fi pirala et E Hei HE ai Oller Fintan AE Gador Fig 114 Create furniture Saved furniture Import Furniture Files You can import furniture files from other programs e g Auto CAD over the menu File gt Import gt Furniture Files DIALux imports furniture files with the ending SAT sat LS DIALux 4 1 Room 1 3D View Edit Paste Luminaire Selection Gutpul 9 PaL ol IPs eH oron wiew CAD Strgt h Strg o Strg 5S iret Export Page Printer Setup Print Preview g Print Strg P Furniture Files k
277. ups are handed over DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 258 Additional settings are possible in the Quick preference tab DIALux Version 4 4 automatically In the menu file Export you find the option Raytracing with POV Ray which opens a dialogue where the usually recommended settings are selected In the quick preference tab you can define the basic settings for your first applications Experienced users might change options for ndirect Calculation Brightness Preferences and Image Preferences Quick preferences Render image with POY Ray xj Indirect calculation Brightnes preferences Quick preference Image preferences Picture ptopettias image EME O Smoothing edges M Autobumpmaps Lighting preferences F Subdivide luminanes Indirect caiculatior User Datned Pieci prelerences Directory in which the POV Ray project is generated thie ia where the calculated image n finaly located C Programme DIALuntA ay racesS POYV2AF Browse Additional settings I Display outer wale of rocemne transparently I Generate floor I Show daylight obetuchan i Smoother segmented laces Opbans mated with marked lengthen calculabon time but at the same time improve mage qually Fig 423 Basic settings for Raytracing In the quick preferences tab there are the following settings e Picture properties Here you can define the size of the generated picture in pixels length x height The larger
278. us emittance 2 Lafl Maintenance interval Every 3 0 years T Closed IFs Hours of operation per 2 58 5 day single shift year in 1000 hours 2 58 5 day single shitt Replacement interval lamps in year f O Lamp type Tri phosphorus fluoresce MW Individual replacement of defective lamps Luminaire type Edit individual factors manually WE D ASk D LHF D LLM D LSF ase mea 0 73 x 0 93 fioo Mote New values directly from manufacturer Umin aires Total Planing value 1654 x 1846 Ix New 2608 x 2049 Ix Fig 89 Property Page Maintenance factor On this Property Page the user can optimize the maintenance factor for the luminaire arrangement If the luminaire manufacturer has defined maintenance parameters for this luminaire in his Plugin or his ULD file this will be marked in the field Luminaire type and also if it is available under Lamp type The maintenance factor depends on the ambient conditions already defined in the Property Page of the room the mounting height because of room index k is defined using mounting height the hours of operation insert at this point and the lamp and luminaires maintenance interval define also at this point If the luminaire manufacturer has defined no parameters the user can choose under luminaire type and lamp type in the drop down lists from the CIE example data If you want to use other factors for some reasons you can mark the checkbox in the lower area
279. ven floor will be given The second graphic table will show the maximum distances for the mounting of the luminaire to achieve a desired illuminance for example 1 x It will list several mounting heights 2m up to 5m and the mounting options wall to transverse transverse to transverse transverse to axial axial to axial and axial to wall ies bled beaded a T LE ee bager 1 A Ho e Pe M Fig 198 Output Emergency lighting data sheet Escape route lighting To do an escape route design you have to insert one or more escape route calculation object s The escape route can be edited by entering the coordinates or by moving with the mouse With a right click additional points can be inserted to add a kink to the escape route The width can be set to a maximum of 2m DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 130 DIALux Version 4 4 Miami he Wt i a a T WE H je ae pe i ail CITE a f i i E Ema u i i i fa i i i i i i J i i ie i Fig 199 Emergency lighting Modify escape route The surface is placed on the floor but you can move it around freely After placing these escape route object s a luminaire has to be selected With a right click on the escape route a luminaire arrangement of single luminaires can be placed above the escape route Ca ee ee eee Edit Escape Route Insert Escape Route Lighting Align and distribute Copy Along a Line
280. virtual planes with DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 175 DIALux Version 4 4 DIALux It is not necessary for the user to make any special settings Task Areas Task areas are calculation surfaces that consist of two parts In DIN 5035 T7 and EN 12464 these two parts are defined The two parts are the inner Work Area and the outer Surrounding Area You can edit the polygonal shape of areas by clicking the right mouse button The two parts are defined in the following way o Both areas are plane parallel o The complete task area is positioned within the Surrounding area The output shows Isoline and greyscale diagram for both areas together Value charts and value tables are listed separately for each area gec ee hy Ronm i pina pias IPH La a m To LE Es 4 ahs Lae x F mm ame as Sit Wor a ETT ee LAE p betie Biy m deiae E Copy Arre i Liias H ae laa rm k pij cet Tora E 5S K JA Tut dd Copy W Delete 1104 m LHT m EEN m HR Fig 283 Edit work area and surrounding area Calculation Points To get calculation results for a number of selected points You can use horizontal calculation points vertical calculation points and free calculation points DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 176 DIALux Version 4 4 a oe iddeda tease A 2 hoes E ARERI e Er nila af lt 9 GE Paar Te m Meee E E shimis paimi rF GETE TLE EI aa ammu p a Teee DE SS i
281. want to use a filter with all luminaires in the room or exterior scene just hold down the CTRL key while you drop it on any luminaire Luminaires with rotatable elements can have a filter with each light emitting object individually Coaction of spectral distribution of the light source and colour filter Most lighting calculation software has for each light source only one spectrum or even just a RGB value But this is not enough for a professional lighting designer The resulting colour is defined by the spectrum of the light source and the transmission spectrum of the filter Lome eile Lo L Lit coka San ranar Aoier Lit cakar Hake neia ja Gedherge FET ee se mN DETENTE Fe Ti D amga Teese Y7 3 D amaa eere uera rE Ahi ahd la Fig 171 Resulting spectrum of a luminaire with two times the same filter but different light sources The two pictures above are from the Property Pages of two luminaires In both cases the same colour filter was used However the light sources are different one is a high pressure sodium lamp and the other is a metal halide lamp Of course the resulting spectrum is totally different Also the transmission factor is different The DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 114 DIALux Version 4 4 transmission factor given for the filter at D65 is even higher at 41 6 Fig 172 All the spots are using the same colour filter but have different light sources From the left Incandescent Flourescen
282. wer 36 w Correction factor 1 000 Correction reason E Project 1 El py Luminaires Used oy 12 DIAL 15iNOVA El 4 Room 1 _ Workplane i Floor wi Ceiling H 0 Wall surfaces Luminaires E iy Field Arrangement oy 12x DIAL 1SiINOVA Fig 54 Property Page of the luminaires within the selection Edit Mode When certain options are used DIALux 4 2 switches to an edit mode For example this happens in the following Situations o Free input of anew room o Change room dimensions at a later stage o Edit a ground element in an exterior scene o Edit a calculation surface o Edit an extrusion volume To switch to the edit mode go to the Project manager select the object you want to edit with the right mouse button and click on Edit Room Geometry Edit Ground Element or Edit Calculation Surface Alternatively you can select the options trom the menu Edit A third way is to click on Edit Room Geometry in The Guide It is advisable to modify the room geometry in the ground plan view DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 48 Interactive room editing DIALux Version 4 4 E 9 Project 1 B S Luminaires Used at sel d Wor Insert Luminaires l Edit Room Geometry snnm elll 5 Edit daylight eee El Wall i iE Ea E Calculate 2 Og Insert light scene Insert control group Gy Lum o E E 30 Standard view Fe L Floor Plan 8 Y Level Symbolic F9 Duplicate Room gt Delete abi Rename
283. while holding the mouse button pressed e Move use this mode to move the area that Is displayed in the window If you have a three button mouse this option is always assigned to DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 144 DIALux Version 4 4 the mouse button in the middle e Roam Scene o Left click and move the mouse to move forward backward or to rotate on the spot o Left click holding the CTRL key you can roam up down left or right the viewing direction remains constant o Left click holding the Shift key gt you remain on the spot and can look around yOu You can change the focal distance of the camera in the 3D view by selecting the mouse mode zoom loupe symbol While zooming left click and move the mouse hold the CTRL key at the same time Boe 1 Daybyll Light scene piled 100k Te 206m iom O00 NU Fig 221 Change perspective and focal distance of the camera Check Calculation Values in the 3D View With the help of the Luxmeter function you can see the calculated illuminance value of any selected point To do this you should switch to the 3D view enable the Tool tios for calculation results and select the Rotate view mouse mode Move the mouse pointer to any position in the CAD window The calculation results are displayed at the bottom of the figure In order to indicate different points of calculation in your CAD window
284. window Project Information you enter your data and the data of your customer Both will appear later on the printout After completing the data entry please click on Next real ean W ng ee ee ee Oe PF ml ioe pe ie ae amp a fi Pee lisin F atara pera ma i wi eee fee Geet ee ell bp ee oe g a oe Faih mre eo ee a Coy eee imi 0 O Fig 7 DIALux Light Wizard Project information In the window Data Input you specify the room geometry on the left hand side By default DIALux Light produces a rectangular room If you check the box Use L Shaped Room DIALux Light shows a L shaped room Enter the relevant dimensions with regard to the room figure drawing You can change on the left hand side the reflectance of the ceiling walls and floor The wall reflectance selected applies to all the walls Faia irga i ew she PLEPI A Tp p ee ee A PORA ml Caine ru a i iea Calg T i r pu Ej a e mapa Tet Lied lisann Som Fa 8 Seamed pee mt Fem farri Eetceey oat a ee oe ere Hakai fhe ZATA a pomem A e Fe eee a Wiee E r ee i es eke rt es Fig 8 DIALux Light Wizard Data Input One click on Databases starts a manufacturer Plugin In the Plugin you can select the luminaire which you want to use and then click on Apply or Use Then close the Plugin Now DIALux Light shows you the selected luminaire on the right above By default the last used luminaire is
285. xisting valuation fields Then select both roadway elements for which you would like to have a DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 199 DIALux Version 4 4 common valuation field by pressing the shift key and clicking those roadway elements Then do a right click on the marked objects and choose nsert Valuation Field Now you will get a common valuation field tor both roadway elements m PH pa Lf E e Oh ieee m E a EE E i pani EERE el Sj lt jee a j Tmi em is Fig 326 common valuation field If you mark a valuation field in the Project manager the Property Page calculation grid opens in the Inspector Projektmanager Po Calculation Grid luminance Class ME da wizard Additional Illumination Classes Vertical luminance F Semi culindrical luminance Grid f Automatic Points f 0 E Fig 327 Calculation Grid The grid is generated automatically according to the EN13201 If the checkbox Automatic is chosen the right number of calculation points is always chosen If you want a grid different to the standard here you can give the number of the calculation points in the X direction longitudinal direction of a roadway and the Y direction width of a lane after you have activated the checkbox Points NOTE Then the results are no longer according to the standard EN13201 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 200 DIALux Version 4 4 Projektmanager Calculation Grid
286. y DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 267 DIALux Version 4 4 into the edit field in the top middle of the screen The command for Anti aliasing is a followed by a number without a blank e g a0 001 The lower this value is the higher the smoothing is A POV Ray for Window li at fae Tat Edie Inet Beaia Spee Ta GE Pees lee OD 6 l G Wi G hire Tira Cie EADS AA 0 3 bigyy pee lB i Pe Fig 434 POV Ray for Windows When the POV Ray editor is started the user can always open the help by pressing F1 to get information for any command Picture ratio Images created by DIALux are always in a ratio of 4 3 This is for the most presentation techniques a good value TV projector monitor Modern laptops or TVs have another ratio e g 16 9 and 16 10 After loading the POV file the user can search for the camera command in the text The search command is one of the drop down menus at the top of the window In the menu search you can select find and enter camera Below camera there is a command for the right vector of the used camera There is written lt 1 3333 0 0 gt 1 333 is the ratio 4 3 To achieve a ratio of 16 9 enter there lt 1 7777 gt or 16 9 E g right lt 16 9 0 0 gt It is important to define a correct picture size with the same ratio The following pictures of the same scene are made in 4 3 and 16 9 ratio The 4 3 picture has a resolution of 800 by 600 pixel If
287. y adding energy evaluation rooms to it This can be done either via the context menu of the energy evaluation project or via the context menu of a DIALux room J rami i D werveindete Leuchten a Bregeb tL oe Knee vce QH Projekt 1 2h Shay verwendete Leuchten E Energiebewertung p Raup P Kopii a Raumgeometrie bearbeiten Tageslichtverbauung bearbeiten Berechnen q Lichtszene einf gen Steuergruppe einf gen 3D Standardansicht F8 Grundriss X Y Ebene symbolisch F9 Raum duplizieren L schag Energiebewertungsraum erzeugen N eere Fig 389 Transfer of one single DIALux room into the energy evaluation project project With the first method all rooms of a DIALux project can rapidly be transfered to the energy evaluation project so that they are part of the energy evaluation Besides you can create energy evaluation rooms without links to DIALux rooms in this context menu Thus you DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 236 DIALux Version 4 4 can evaluate energy demands for rooms without doing any lighting planning for them More about that later on The second method via the conext menu of one or even multiple DIALux rooms is best if you do not want all rooms of a DIALux project to be part of the energy evaluation Caution Each DIALux room can only be linked with one single energy evaluation room Links with multiple energy evaluation rooms do not make sense since each ener
288. y right clicking on the arrangement and selecting split Subsequently the position of the individual luminaires can be modified You can also separate a selected arrangement into individual luminaires via the Edit gt Split Luminaire Arrangement menu option Modify the position of a Luminaire To modify the position of a luminaire you can select the luminaire in the Project manager Now you can use the Property Page with the coordinate fields lidi Cae Le ee er a lee Debio i aara T PE T E im doen et oe 2 Fig 150 Modify luminaire data Corrections DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 102 DIALux Version 4 4 pitta te tment nepa reumjiume pang hng er Sg OF 1 DA 2G eee Fig 151 Modify luminaire data Mounting height Luminaires with articulated joints With DIALux it is possible in computer aided lighting design to make use of all the mechanical properties of luminaires In DIALux with 3D luminaire models it is possible as in real lite to grasp the articulated joints and adjust them spots fully suspended systems tloodlights street lighting The manufacturer defines the articulated joints the maximum rotation and even the increments of articulation You simply click on the luminaire and turn it to where the light should be directed Of course you can also do this numerically or graphically Permit Prohibit Selection of Rotatable Luminaire Parts Fig 152 Selection of rotatable l
289. you want to keep the height of 600 pixel you have to multiply the width with the desired ratio In our example 600 x 16 9 600 x 1 7777 1066 DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 268 DIALux Version 4 4 4 Fig 435 Picture ratio les Ewe M o o w lrn Home ates Hef Provan Tsar O heer 800x600 AA 0 3 Messoger OlALuxpow pretracewend oO i Peer ace FEDE 0 08 pror Douni i rA _xhreshol a Ds NAPE COUNT 10 PNETEppPET lin wA Lud AL high value iad Fig 437 Change picture size You can manipulate the picture size by entering the desired size into the edit field with w and h directly followed by the numbers w means width h means height Camera The camera definition describes the position projection type and properties of the camera viewing the scene DIAL GmbH L denscheid page 269 DIALux Version 4 4 Interesting types are spherical cylinder and panoramic In the POV Ray help a number of camera types are explained If none is specified the perspective camera is the default The perspective keyword specifies the default perspective camera which simulates the classic pinhole camera The horizontal viewing angle is either determined by the ratio between the length of the direction vector and the length of the right vector or by the optional keyword angle which is the preferred way The viewing angle has to be larger than 0 degrees and smaller than 180 degrees In the c

DIALux Version 4.4

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents